MF1.0 Help

P O S I T I O N I N G
S Y S T E M S
MAGNET Field 1.0 Help
Part Number Rev
Copyright Topcon Positioning Systems, Inc. January, 2012
All contents in this manual are copyrighted by Topcon Positioning Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. The information contained herein may not be used, accessed, copied, stored, displayed, sold, modified, published, or distributed, or otherwise reproduced without the e pressed written consent from Topcon Positioning Systems, Inc.
ECO#3211
TOC
Table of Contents
Preface .................................................................. xix
Terms and !onditions ...................................................... i "anual !onventions ........................................................ ii
Chapter 1
Intr d!cti n .......................................................... 1"1

Introduction "A#N$T %ield .......................................... &'& !onnections ..................................................................... &'( )ome screen .................................................................... &'( )elp *ptions ................................................................... &'+
Chapter #
Mana$in$ % &' ..................................................... #"1

,ob folder ........................................................................ ('& New ,ob .................................................................... ('( *pen ,ob ................................................................... ('.elete ,ob ................................................................. ('+ ,ob Info ..................................................................... ('/ 0rowse ....................................................................... ('1
Chapter (
C nfi$!rin$ % &' .................................................. ("1

!onfigure folder .............................................................. -'& !onfiguring a New ,ob .................................................... -'( Select Survey !onfiguration .................................... -'( !onfigurations .................................................... -'!oordinate System ................................................... -'+ 2nits ......................................................................... -'+ .isplay ..................................................................... -'1 Alarms ...................................................................... -'3 #PS Survey !onfigurations ............................................. -'4 Receiver "a5e .......................................................... -'4
P/N 7010-0492
Table of Contents
RT6 Survey ............................................................... -'7 0ase Receiver ............................................................ -'7 0ase Peripherals ......................................................... -'&8 Receiver Settings ....................................................... -'&& Radio .......................................................................... -'&& "odem Register ......................................................... -'&( Radio Parameters ....................................................... -'&( 0ase "ulticast ..................................................... -'&!ell Phone ........................................................... -'&.igital 2)% ......................................................... -'&%)7&/ Plus .......................................................... -'&+ Int Satel Parms .................................................... -'&+ Internal )iPer 9ite ............................................... -'&+ Pacific !rest Radio Parms ................................... -'&+ 2)% "odem ....................................................... -'&/ Satel Radio Parms ............................................... -'&/ Rover !."A Parms ........................................... -'&/ Rover !.P. Parms ............................................ -'&/ Rover #PRS Parms ............................................. -'&1 Rover Receiver .......................................................... -'&1 Position for ##A ....................................................... -'&3 R$'S& %)7&/ Repeater ............................................. -'&3 Rover Receiver Peripherals ....................................... -'&4 *utput N"$A ..................................................... -'&7 9ist of N"$A messages ..................................... -'&7 mm#PS: ............................................................. -'(8 9aser !onfiguration ............................................ -'(8 Survey Parameters ..................................................... -'(& Sta5eout Parameters ................................................... -'(( .efining names for the sta5ed points .................. -'(+ Setting notes for the sta5ed points ...................... -'(+ Sta5ed Point Icon ................................................ -'(/ !olor Palette ........................................................ -'(/ Advanced Parameters ................................................ -'(/ "iscellaneous ;#PS< Parameters .............................. -'(3 RT6 Settings ............................................................. -'(3 Networ5 RT6 ................................................................... -'(4 "odem !onnect .................................................. -'(7
Table of Contents
"odem .ialup Info ............................................ "odem Internet Info ........................................... 9ogin Info ........................................................... "odem Receiver Info ......................................... Networ5 .#PS .......................................................... Real Time .#PS ....................................................... !onfig= 0eacon ................................................... S0AS Setup ........................................................ !onfig= *mniSTAR ............................................ #eneric N"$A ......................................................... PP Static .................................................................... PP Setup .............................................................. *ccupation > Initiali?ation Times ....................... PP 6inematic ............................................................. PP .#PS ................................................................... *ptical Survey !onfigurations ........................................ Instrument ................................................................. !onnection mode ...................................................... !able ................................................................... Survey Parameters ..................................................... Survey Parameters .............................................. Sta5eout Parameters .................................................. Point Properties ................................................... "iscellaneous ;*ptical< Parameters ......................... Search>Trac5 ;Topcon< .............................................. Search>Trac5 ;So55ia< ............................................... "onitor *ptions ........................................................ !oordinate System ........................................................... NA.4- .atum .etails .............................................. Pro@ections ................................................................. #rid>#round Parameters ........................................... !ompute Rotation ............................................... !ompute A?imuth>0earing ................................. !ustom Pro@ections ................................................... !reating a !ustom Pro@ection ............................. !ustom Pro@ection Specifications ....................... !ustom .atums ......................................................... !reating a !ustom .atum ..................................
-'(7 -'(7 -'-8 -'-8 -'-8 -'-& -'-( -'-( -'--'--'-+ -'-+ -'-/ -'-/ -'-/ -'-1 -'-1 -'-1 -'-3 -'-3 -'-4 -'-7 -'-7 -'-7 -'+& -'+( -'+( -'+-'++ -'+/ -'+1 -'+1 -'+3 -'+3 -'+3 -'+4 -'+4 -'+7
P/N 7010-0492
iiii ii
Table of Contents
!ustom .atum Specifications ............................. -'+7 !ustom $llipsoids ...................................................... -'+7 !reating a !ustom $llipsoid ............................... -'/8 #eoids ........................................................................ -'/8 Adding a #eoid ................................................... -'/& #lobal Settings ................................................................ -'/& ,ob 0ac5up Settings ........................................................ -'/( !onfiguring "enus ......................................................... -'/!odes Settings ................................................................. -'/+ !onfiguring Sta5e Reports .............................................. -'// Report !onfiguration ................................................. -'// $nterprise !onfigure ....................................................... -'/1
Chapter )
$ changing .ata ..................................................................... +'& $ port To ,ob ................................................................... +'( Select ,ob ................................................................... +'( $ port .ata To ,ob .................................................... +'( %ilter Points 0y Range and !ode;s< .................... +'Select *b@ects to $ port ...................................... +'+ Select !odes %or %ilter ........................................ +'+ $ port Status .............................................................. +'/ Import %rom ,ob ............................................................... +'/ Import .ata %rom ,ob ................................................ +'/ Select *b@ects to Import ...................................... +'1 %ilter Points 0y Range and !ode;s< .................... +'1 Import Status .............................................................. +'3 $ port To %ile .................................................................. +'3 $ port .ata To %ile ................................................... +'4 !ode Style Setup ................................................. +'7 !ode Style Separators ......................................... +'7 !ontrol !odes ...................................................... +'7 %ile 2nits ............................................................. +'&8 Select .ata %or $ port To %ile ........................... +'&8
i$
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Table of Contents
Select %ilters %or Points ...................................... Settings %or Te t !ustom %ormats ..................... Select %ields %or !ustom %ormats ...................... 9atitude>9ongitude Record %ormat .................... Setup .A%>.B# Settings %or $ port ............... Import %rom %ile .............................................................. Setup Settings %or Import ................................... Import of "ultiple .ata Types ................................. 9ist of Imported *b@ects ..................................... $ port To -."! ............................................................. Import %rom -."! ......................................................... $nterprise 2pload ............................................................ $nterprise .ownload ....................................................... .uplicate ob@ects .............................................................
Chapter *
+'&8 +'&& +'&& +'&& +'&& +'&( +'&+'&+ +'&+ +'&+ +'&/ +'&1 +'&1 +'&1
Import .ata %rom %ile .............................................. +'&-
!hatting .................................................................................. /'&

Chapter +
$diting ,ob .ata ..................................................................... $dit Points ........................................................................ Point Info ................................................................... 9inewor5 Pac5age ..................................................... !ode ' Attributes ....................................................... "ulti'!ode .......................................................... Point !hec5 ............................................................... 9ayer>Style ................................................................ BA ............................................................................ Photo Note ................................................................. Photo Note Pop up menu .................................... !ompass !alibration ........................................... Image !apture ..................................................... PT9 ............................................................................ Point !hec5 ......................................................... %ind by Point ...................................................... %ind by !ode ......................................................
P/N 7010-0492
1'& 1'( 1'1'1'+ 1'/ 1'1 1'1 1'3 1'3 1'3 1'4 1'7 1'7 1'7 1'&8 1'&8
Table of Contents
!hec5 Points .............................................................. 1'&8 !ut Sheet .................................................................... 1'&& !ode ' Attributes .............................................................. 1'&& !ode ........................................................................... 1'&& Attributes ................................................................... 1'&( "ultiple !ode Strings ......................................... 1'&!ontrol !ode ....................................................... 1'&9inewor5 .......................................................................... 1'&$dit Area .......................................................................... 1'&+ Points in Area ............................................................ 1'&+ Point 9ists ......................................................................... 1'&/ Point 9ist .................................................................... 1'&1 Select Points 0y Range ....................................... 1'&3 Select Points by !ode .......................................... 1'&3 Select Points by Radius ....................................... 1'&3 Select Points by !ode Strings ............................. 1'&3 Point 9ist !hec5 .................................................. 1'&4 9ayers ............................................................................... 1'&4 9ayer .......................................................................... 1'&4 Style ........................................................................... 1'&7 !olor Palette ........................................................ 1'&7 *b@ects ....................................................................... 1'&7 Setup Selection .................................................... 1'(& Angle Sets Report ............................................... 1'(& $dit Raw .ata ............................................................ 1'(& 9ist of Sta5e Reports ........................................................ 1'(( $dit Sta5e Report ....................................................... 1'(( Ciew Sta5e Report .............................................. 1'(0ac5ground Images .......................................................... 1'(Properties ................................................................... 1'(Roads %older .................................................................... 1'(+ Roads ................................................................................ 1'(/ Add>$dit Roads .......................................................... 1'(/ Start Point .................................................................. 1'(1 Certical Alignment .................................................... 1'(3 Add>$dit Road ........................................................... 1'(4 9ong Section ....................................................... 1'(4 )ori?ontal Alignment ................................................ 1'(7
$i
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Table of Contents
9ine ..................................................................... 1'-8 !urve .................................................................. 1'-8 Spiral ................................................................... 1'-& Intersection Point ................................................ 1'-( Certical Alignment .................................................... 1'-( Certical #rade ..................................................... 1'-!urve .................................................................. 1'-A'Section ................................................................... 1'-+ A'Section ............................................................ 1'-/ !alculate Road Points ............................................... 1'-/ !enterline Point Params ..................................... 1'-/ Right>9eft *ffset Points Params ......................... 1'-1 )ori?ontal alignments ...................................................... 1'-3 Certical alignments .......................................................... 1'-3 )igh>9ow Positions ................................................... 1'-4 A'Section Templates ....................................................... 1'-7 A'Sect Template ........................................................ 1'-7 Segment .............................................................. 1'+8 A'Section Set ................................................................... 1'+8 String Set ......................................................................... 1'+& Add>$dit String Set ................................................... 1'+& Add>$dit Road String Alignment Pair ................ 1'+(
Chapter ,
!alculate ................................................................................. 3'& !alculate %older ............................................................. 3'& !alculate Inverse ...................................................... Two Point Inverse ............................................... Inverse Point to 9ine ........................................... Inverse Point to !urve ........................................ Inverse Point to Point 9ist .................................. Point in .irection ...................................................... !alculate !urves ...................................................... 3'( 3'3'+ 3'/ 3'1 3'3 3'4
!urve Solution .................................................... 3'7 PI D Tangents ..................................................... 3'&8 Three Pt !urve .................................................... 3'&&
P/N 7010-0492
$ii
Table of Contents
Radius D Points ................................................... 3'&Intersection ................................................................ 3'&/ !alculator ......................................................................... 3'&1 !alculator ................................................................... 3'&7 !alculate Area ........................................................... 3'(& !omp Area .......................................................... 3'(& 6nown Area ' )inge ........................................... 3'(( 6nown Area ' 9ine .............................................. 3'(!orner Angle ............................................................. 3'(/ !alculate *ffsets ....................................................... 3'(/ 9ine D *ffset ...................................................... 3'(1 !urve D *ffsets .................................................. 3'(3 Road *ffset ......................................................... 3'(4 Station D *ffsets ................................................. 3'(4 !alculate Ad@ust ......................................................... 3'(7 Rotate .................................................................. 3'(7 Translate .............................................................. 3'-8 Scale .................................................................... 3'-& (. Transform ...................................................... 3'-& Traverse Ad@ustment ........................................... 3'-( Ad@ustment !lose ................................................ 3'-( Ad@ustment Results ............................................. 3'-Point Pair Info ..................................................... 3'-(. Transform Parameters ................................... 3'-+ Traverse !alc ............................................................. 3'-+ 0S Point .............................................................. 3'-1 !alculate .T" ......................................................... 3'-3 .T" Columes .................................................... 3'-3 !reating .T" ..................................................... 3'-4 #eneral Icons ...................................................... 3'+& $diting 0oundary ................................................ 3'+& !ontouring .T" ................................................. 3'+(
Chapter -
"ap ......................................................................................... 4'& "ap .................................................................................. 4'( "ap Properties ........................................................... 4'Eoom In>*ut>Bindow ............................................... 4'-
$iii
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Table of Contents
Eoom All ................................................................... 4'Eoom 0y Point .......................................................... 4'Chapter .
!onnections ............................................................................ 7'& !onnections .................................................................... 7'& #eneral !onnection Settings ..................................... 7'& Bluetooth ..................................................... .......... 9-2 Device Discovery ............................................ 9-2 Authentication ............................................. ... 9-3 Bluetooth Connection .................................... 9-3 $nterprise !onnection ............................................... 7'Networ5 !onnection Settings ................................... 7'+
Chapter 10
Setting up #PS Survey ........................................................... &8'& Setup folder ................................................................... &8'& Setup #PS folder ....................................................... &8'& Status ................................................................................ &8'( Position ...................................................................... &8'( Status pop'up menu ............................................ &8'System ....................................................................... &8'+ Solution type ....................................................... &8'/ 9og )istory ............................................................... &8'/ "ulti 0ase Status ...................................................... &8'1 Scatter Plot ................................................................ &8'3 SCs ............................................................................ &8'3 "ission Planning ....................................................... &8'4 "ission Planning Setting .................................... &8'7 Satellite 9ist ........................................................ &8'&8 Satellite Number ................................................. &8'&8 7010-0492 i%
P/N
Table of Contents P.*P
.................................................................. &8'&8 Start 0ase ........................................................................ &8'&8
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Table of Contents
"ulti 0ase .................................................................. &8'&& Start 0ase pop'up menu ...................................... &8'&& Static *ccupation ............................................................ &8'&( 9ocali?ation ..................................................................... &8'&( Add 9ocali?ation Point .............................................. &8'&+ 9ocali?ation Results ................................................... &8'&+ Simulator ......................................................................... &8'&/ 6nown Point Initiali?ation .............................................. &8'&/ 6PI Position ............................................................... &8'&1 mm#PS Initiali?ation ...................................................... &8'&1 Transmitter Position ................................................... &8'&3 Transmitter Position ................................................... &8'&4 Sensor ........................................................................ &8'&4 Resect mm#ps: Resect ............................................. &8'&7 Resect mm#ps: Sensor ............................................. &8'&7 .ata ............................................................................ &8'(8 Transmitter ................................................................. &8'(8 %ield !alibration ........................................................ &8'(& 2pdate !alibration .ata ...................................... &8'(& 6nown Point .............................................................. &8'(( 6nown Point *ffset ............................................. &8'(( mm#PS: *ptions ...................................................... &8'(Settings ...................................................................... &8'(Sessions ........................................................................... &8'(+ Sessions ...................................................................... &8'(+ Session Setup ............................................................. &8'(/
Chapter 11
#PS Survey ............................................................................. &&'& Survey folder ................................................................... &&'& Survey #PS ...................................................................... &&'& Topo ................................................................................. &&'( .ata ............................................................................ &&'"ap ............................................................................ &&'Auto Topo ........................................................................ &&'Raw .ata ................................................................... &&'+
P/N 7010-0492
%i
Table of Contents
Raw #ps: ........................................................... &&'+ #ps *ffsets ................................................................ &&'/ !ross Section ................................................................... &&'/ !ross Section ............................................................. &&'1 %ind Station ...................................................................... &&'1 Tape .imension ............................................................... &&'3 Ref 9ine .............................................................. &&'4 A'Section ......................................................................... &&'4 .ata ..................................................................... &&'7 "ap ..................................................................... &&'7 PT9 "ode ................................................................. &&'7 9aser Setup ...................................................................... &&'&8
Chapter 1#
*ptical Survey Setup .............................................................. &('& Setup *ptical ;Total Station< folder ................................ &('& BS Survey ........................................................................ &('( !hec5 0ac5sight ........................................................ &('Remote !ontrol ................................................................ &('+ Robotic Arrows ......................................................... &('+ Resection .......................................................................... &('/ Resection *ptions ..................................................... &('/
Chapter 1(
*ptical Survey ........................................................................ &-'& Survey *ptical ;Total Station< ......................................... &-'& Topo Survey ..................................................................... &-'( Sideshot'.irect .......................................................... &-'( Sideshot'.irect>Reverse ............................................ &-'Ang>dist Sets'.ir>Rev ............................................... &-'*ffsets .............................................................................. &-'Station and *ffset ...................................................... &-'+ )A *ffset .................................................................. &-'/ )?>Ct Angle *ffset ................................................... &-'/ .istance *ffset .......................................................... &-'1 )idden Point .............................................................. &-'3 Two 9ine Intersection ............................................... &-'3 9ine and !orner ......................................................... &-'4
%ii
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Table of Contents
9ine and *ffset .......................................................... &-'7 Plane and !orner ........................................................ &-'7 Auto Topo ........................................................................ &-'&8 $levation ;"ultiple< ......................................................... &-'&& "ultiple 0ac5sight ........................................................... &-'&( "ulti Set Page .................................................................. &-'&( %ind Station ...................................................................... &-'&"issing 9ine ..................................................................... &-'&+ Tape .imension ............................................................... &-'&+ Reference 9ine ........................................................... &-'&+ ASect'.irect>Reverse ....................................................... &-'&/ Remote Rotate .................................................................. &-'&1 Remote Scanning .............................................................. &-'&1 Scanning .................................................................... &-'&3 Ciew Scan .................................................................. &-'&4 *rientation ................................................................. &-'&4 *rientation Results .................................................... &-'&4 Scan ............................................................................ &-'&7 Scan ............................................................................ &-'&7 Interval ....................................................................... &-'&7 $stimate Time ............................................................ &-'(8 "onitor ............................................................................. &-'(8 "onitor *ptions ......................................................... &-'(& "onitor Pointlist ........................................................ &-'((
Chapter 1)
9evel Survey ........................................................................... &+'& !rteate 9evel Run ............................................................. &+'& 9evel Run ................................................................... &+'& Shots .......................................................................... &+'( Sta5e SS ..................................................................... &+'( Two Peg Test .................................................................... &+'( Two Peg Test Results ................................................ &+'Settings ...................................................................... &+'Chapter 1*
Sta5ing .................................................................................... &/'& Sta5e folder ..................................................................... &/'&
%ii
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Table of Contents
Sta5e Point ....................................................................... Sta5e pop'up menu ............................................. Sta5e .9 Point ................................................................. Sta5e 9ine ........................................................................ Sta5e ................................................................................ .ata %ields ................................................................ Ciews ......................................................................... .ata Ciew ........................................................... "ap Ciew ........................................................... Normal Ciew ...................................................... *verhead Ciew ................................................... !ross Section Ciew ............................................ Surface Ciew ...................................................... Sta5eout .9 ..................................................................... Certical *ffset .9 ..................................................... Sta5e *ffsets .................................................................... Sta5e 9ine D *ffsets ................................................. Transition Points ................................................. Station D *ffset .................................................. Intersection D *ffsets > 9ine & .................................. Intersection D *ffsets > 9ine ( .................................. Three Pt !urve .......................................................... Sta5e !urve D *ffsets .............................................. Sta5e Spiral D *ffset ................................................ Sta5e Surface ................................................................... Sta5e Surface $levation ................................................... Surface 0oundary ...................................................... Sta5e Surface Road ................................................... Sta5e .T" ....................................................................... *pen .T" ................................................................ Sta5e Point in .irection ................................................... Sta5e Point 9ist ................................................................ Sta5e .9 Point 9ist ......................................................... Sta5eout $levation ........................................................... Sta5e !urve ...................................................................... Sta5e Real'Time Road ..................................................... Sta5e Road ;Slope< .......................................................... Sta5e Road .......................................................................
&/'( &/'&/'&/'+ &/'/ &/'1 &/'1 &/'1 &/'1 &/'1 &/'3 &/'3 &/'3 &/'3 &/'3 &/'4 &/'4 &/'7 &/'&8 &/'&8 &/'&& &/'&& &/'&( &/'&&/'&+ &/'&+ &/'&/ &/'&1 &/'&1 &/'&3 &/'&4 &/'&7 &/'&7 &/'(8 &/'(& &/'(& &/'(( &/'((
P/N 7010-0492
%iii
Table of Contents
Sta5e Road Alignment ..................................................... &/'(Sta5e Slope ....................................................................... &/'(+ Sta5e Slope Alignment ........................................ &/'(+ Sta5e 9inewor5 ................................................................ &/'(1 Station D *ffsets ....................................................... &/'(1 .esign *ffsets ........................................................... &/'(3 Set References > Surface and Point References ......... &/'(4 Initial Point Name ...................................................... &/'(4 .esign Pt>9ayer ......................................................... &/'(7 Store Point ........................................................................ &/'(7 Sta5e Tab ................................................................... &/'(7 .ata Tab ..................................................................... &/'(7 .esign Tab ................................................................. &/'-8 *ffset from !P ........................................................... &/'-8 Select Calue ...................................................................... &/'-&
Chapter 1+
Applications ............................................................................ &1'& Apps folder ...................................................................... &1'& Appendi A )ow To ................................................................................... A'& 9ocali?ation in "A#N$T %ield ...................................... A'& 0asic !oncept of 9ocali?ation ................................... A'( 9ocali?ation with Stereographic Pro@ection on B#S4+ A'9ocali?ation with Stereographic Pro@ection on any .atum A'+ 9ocali?ation with any Predefined or !reated Pro@ection A'+ *ne'point locali?ation ............................................... A'/ Two'point 9ocali?ation ............................................. A'1 Three'point 9ocali?ation ........................................... A'1 Performing 9ocali?ation ............................................ A'3 Importing the coordinate sets to "A#N$T %ield @ob A'7 Setting the desired pro@ection .................................... A'&& Adding the #eoid file ................................................ A'&& !reating 9ocali?ation Points ...................................... A'&( Importing 9ocali?ation .ata to *ther ,ob ................. A'&#rid to #round Transformation ....................................... A'&+ !reating #round Pro@ection Relative to a Point ........ A'&/
%i$
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Table of Contents
$ ample of using F*rigin PtF ................................... A'&1 !reating #round Pro@ection Relative to the *rigin of #rid System .................................................................... A'&4 *ffsets in "A#N$T %ield .............................................. A'(8 *ffsets for TS Survey ................................................ A'(8 )ori?ontal Angle *ffset ..................................... A'(& )ori?ontal>Certical Angle *ffset ....................... A'(( .istance *ffset ................................................... A'()idden Point ....................................................... A'(+ Two 9ines Intersection ....................................... A'(/ 9ine and !orner .................................................. A'(1 9ine and *ffset ................................................... A'(4 Plane and !orner ................................................ A'(7 *ffsets for #PS Survey ............................................. A'-8 *ffset 9ine .......................................................... A'-& A?imuth and *ffsets ........................................... A'-( *ffset 9aser ........................................................ A'-+
P/N 7010-0492
%$
Table of Contents
%$i
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
P&efa'e
P&efa'e
Than5 you for purchasing your Topcon receiver, survey product or accessory ;the GProductH<. The materials available in this manual ;the G"anualH< have been prepared by Topcon Positioning Systems, Inc. ;GTPSH< for owners of Topcon products. This "anual is designed to assist owners with the use of software ;the GSoftwareH< to be used with the Product and its use is sub@ect to these terms and conditions ;the GTerms and !onditionsH<
NOTICE
NOTICE
Please read these Terms and Conditions carefully.
Ter/' and C nditi n'

0SE This product is designed to be used by a professional. The user
should have a good 5nowledge of the safe use of the product and implement the types of safety procedures recommended by the local government protection agency for both private use and commercial @ob sites.
COPY1IGHT All information contained in this "anual is the
intellectual property of, and copyrighted material of TPS. All rights are reserved. Iou may not use, access, copy, store, display, create derivative wor5s of, sell, modify, publish, distribute, or allow any third party access to, any graphics, content, information or data in this "anual without TPSJ e press written consent and may only use such information for the care and operation of your Product. The information and data in this "anual are a valuable asset of TPS and are developed by the e penditure of considerable wor5, time and money, and are the result of original selection, coordination and arrangement by TPS.
P/N 7010-0492
2-%i%
T1A2EMA13S TopconK, )iPerK, TopS2RCL, Topcon 9in5L,
Topcon ToolsL, and Topcon Positioning SystemsL are trademar5s or registered trademar5s of TPS. BindowsK and ActiveSyncK are registered trademar5s of the "icrosoft !orporation. 0luetoothK is a registered trademar5 owned by 0luetooth SI#, Inc. and is used by Topcon Positioning Systems, Inc. under license. So55ia !orporation and the names of So55ia !orporation products referenced herein are either trademar5s or registered trademar5s of So55ia !orporation. Satel is a trademar5 of Satel, *y. *ther product and company names mentioned herein may be trademar5s of their respective owners.
2ISC4AIME1 OF 5A11ANTY $A!$PT %*R ANI
BARRANTI$S IN AN APP$N.IA *R A BARRANTI !AR. A!!*"PANIIN# T)$ PR*.2!T, T)IS "AN2A9, T)$ PR*.2!T, AN. ANI A!!*"PANIIN# S*%TBAR$ AR$ PR*CI.$. GAS'IS.H T)$R$ AR$ N* *T)$R BARRANTI$S. TPS .IS!9AI"S ANI I"P9I$. BARRANTI *% "$R!)ANTA0I9ITI *R %ITN$SS %*R ANI PARTI!29AR 2S$ *R P2RP*S$. TPS AN. ITS .ISTRI02T*RS S)A99 N*T 0$ 9IA09$ %*R T$!)NI!A9 *R $.IT*RIA9 $RR*RS *R *"ISSI*NS !*NTAIN$. )$R$INM N*R %*R IN!I.$NTA9 *R !*NS$N2$NTIA9 .A"A#$S R$S29TIN# %R*" T)$ %2RNIS)IN#, P$R%*R"AN!$ *R 2S$ *% T)IS "AT$RIA9, T)$ S*%TBAR$, *R T)$ PR*.2!T. S2!) .IS!9AI"$. .A"A#$S IN!92.$, 02T AR$ N*T 9I"IT$. T*, 9*SS *% TI"$, 9*SS *R .$STR2!TI*N *% .ATA, 9*SS *% PR*%IT, SACIN#S *R R$C$N2$, *R 9*SS *% T)$ PR*.2!TJS 2S$. IN A..ITI*N, TPS IS N*T R$SP*NSI09$ *R 9IA09$ %*R .A"A#$S *R !*STS IN!2RR$. IN !*NN$!TI*N BIT) *0TAININ# S20STIT2T$ PR*.2!TS *R S*%TBAR$, !9AI"S 0I *T)$RS, IN!*NC$NI$N!$, *R ANI *T)$R !*STS. IN ANI $C$NT, TPS S)A99 )AC$ N* 9IA0I9ITI %*R .A"A#$S *R *T)$RBIS$ T* I*2 *R ANI *T)$R P$RS*N *R $NTITI IN $A!$SS *% T)$ P2R!)AS$ PRI!$ %*R T)$ P*R.2!T.
4ICENSE AG1EEMENT 2se of the Software and any other
computer programs or software supplied by TPS or downloaded from a TPS website ;the GSoftwareH< to be used with a Topcon Product constitutes
2-%%
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
acceptance of these Terms and !onditions in this "anual and an agreement to abide by these Terms and !onditions. The user is granted a personal, non'e clusive, non'transferable license to use such Software under the terms stated herein and in any case only with a single Product or single computer. Iou may ma5e one ;&< bac5up copy of the Software. *therwise, the Software may not be copied or reproduced. Iou may not assign or transfer the Software or this license without the e press written consent of TPS. This license is effective until terminated. Iou may terminate the license at any time by destroying the Software and "anual. TPS may terminate the license if you fail to comply with any of the Terms or !onditions. Iou agree to destroy the Software and manual upon termination of your use of the Product. All ownership, copyright and other intellectual property rights in and to the Software belong to TPS. If these license terms are not acceptable, return any unused Software and the "anual.
CONFI2ENTIA4ITY This "anual, its contents and the Software
;collectively, the G!onfidential InformationH< are the confidential and proprietary information of TPS. Iou agree to treat TPSJ !onfidential Information with a degree of care no less stringent than the degree of care you would use in safeguarding your own most valuable trade secrets. Nothing in this paragraph shall restrict you from disclosing !onfidential Information to your employees as may be necessary or appropriate to operate or care for the Product. Such employees must also 5eep the !onfidentiality Information confidential. In the event you become legally compelled to disclose any of the !onfidential Information, you shall give TPS immediate notice so that it may see5 a protective order or other appropriate remedy.
5E6SITE7 OTHE1 STATEMENTS No statement contained at the
TPS website ;or any other website< or in any other advertisements or TPS literature or made by an employee or independent contractor of TPS modifies these Terms and !onditions ;including the Software 9icense Agreement, .isclaimer of Barranty and limitation of liability<.
SAFETY Improper use of a Topcon Product can lead to in@ury to
persons or property and>or malfunction of the Product. The Product should only be repaired by authori?ed TPS warranty service centers.
2sers should review and heed the safety warnings in the manual accompanying the Product.
MISCE44ANEO0S The above Terms and !onditions may be
amended, modified, superseded, or canceled, at any time by TPS. The above Terms and !onditions will be governed by, and construed in accordance with, the laws of the State of !alifornia, without reference to conflict of laws.
Man!al C n8enti n'

This manual uses the following conventions= $ ample File E it Enter Notes Topo T(P $ planation tap the %ile menu and tap $ it. Indicates the button or 5ey labeled $nter. Indicates a field on a dialog bo or screen, or a tab within a dialog bo or screen. Indicates the name of a dialog bo or screen
TIP
)*##le+enta&, info&+ation t-at 'an -el# ,o* 'onfi.*&e/ +aintain/ o& set *# a s,ste+!
NOTICE
NOTICE
Supplementary information that can have an affect on system operation, system performance, measurements, personal safety.
2-%%ii
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
C-a#te& 1
(nt&o *'tion
Intr d!cti n MAGNET Field
"A#N$T %ield is a field application of the "A#N$T software system that also includes the office and the web service ;"A#N$T $nterprise< applications. .ata from the field and office applications can be used by "A#N$T $nterprise for graphical representation of the pro@ect on the $nterprise #oogle map. This )elp provides information for the "A#N$T %ield application. %or help using the other applications of the "A#N$T software system, refer to the application )elp. To wor5 with a fully featured "A#N$T %ield, you need to activate it. After successfully installing the application on the device, you are prompted to activate the Product using the Activation "anager wi?ard, which guides you through the process.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Once activated MA NET !ield does not re"uire a ne# activation after updatin$. If you cancel activation, the application will run in .emo mode, which allows you to store up to five points. Also, you can clear the Activate MAGNET Field now chec5 bo at the end of the "A#N$T %ield installation to wor5 in .emo mode. The activated "A#N$T %ield will prompt you to establish !onnections with the .evice before opening a @ob and with the $nterprise pro@ect to e change data. Bhen the connection with the device is established, the )ome screen is displayed.
(nt&o *'tion
C nnecti n'
Bhen "A#N$T %ield runs for the first time, clic5 the )ome button
to open the )ome screen for the default @ob. Then you can create a @ob with a reOuired configuration to wor5. *n each subseOuent "A#N$T %ield startup, the !onnections dialog runs for the current @ob.
H /e 'creen
Clic9 an ic n t pen the f lder r exec!te the c //and:
,ob "anages @obs. !onfigure "anages @ob configurations. $ change $ changes data between an active @ob and other @obs, files and enterprise pro@ects. !hat !hats with online recipients. $dit $dits e isting @ob data. !alculate !alculates various coordinate geometry tas5s.
1-2
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
"o+e s'&een
"ap Shows the current @ob data on the map.

!onnect Switches between #PS and optical instruments, and sets connections with the instrument, a networ5, and with "A#N$T $nterprise. Setup Sets up surveying= #PS: survey or *ptical ;Total Station< survey. 2navailable for 9evel configuration style. Survey !onducts a survey= #PS: survey or *ptical survey. Not available for a #PS static and 9evel surveys. Two Peg Test Performs the Two Peg Test for a 9evel survey. 9evel Run Sets up a 9evel survey in running mode. Sta5e Sta5es different ob@ects. Apps 2ses applications that are pre'installed on the same device as the "A#N$T %ield.
P/N 7010-0492
1-3
(nt&o *'tion
The top banner of the home screen shows the name of the @ob that is open and associate icons= *ptions Provides access to )elp files and options that are specific to the current open screen. Indicates the power status of the controller battery. Indicates the connection status with the enterprise= a green chec5 mar5 means there is an established connection and a red cross means that the connection is off. Iou can connect>reconnect in the !onnections dialog. Indicates the connection status with the device. Iou can connect>reconnect with the device in the !onnections dialog. If the device is disconnected, the indicator is grey. Bhen connecting, it turns yellow, then green, and finally turns into the image of the connected device with a green chec5 mar5 near it. !loses the program.
Returns to the home screen.
Help Opti n'

!lic5 the icon to open a menu of options which may be useful for you. $very screen and dialog in "A#N$T %ield has such an icon in 1-4
MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el#
"el# O#tions
the top left corner, the menu, opened by clic5ing the icon, always contains the )elp option and may contain some additional options specific to the current screen. The help options for the home screen and for every folder are as follows= )elp Access help files. 6eyboard !hec5 mar5 to enable type entries in a dialogDP-7Ms fields using the soft 5eyboard. !hats !lic5 !hats 'Q !reate New to configure a chat with the "A#N$T $nterprise users. %ind out more... Port .ata 9ogging !lic5 to view incoming and outgoing traffic information of a controller port connected to "A#N$T %ield. %ind out more... Activate "odules !lic5 to view or change the license activation of the modules in "A#N$T %ield. %ind out more... About !lic5 to view basic information about "A#N$T %ield software.
P/N 7010-0492
1-0
(nt&o *'tion
Notes2
1-1
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
C-a#te& 2
Mana.in. 3obs
!lic5 the Jo! icon on the )ome screen to manage @obs. ,obs include all data collected in surveys of different configurations.
% & f lder
2pon installation, "A#N$T %ield only contains and opens the default @ob.
Clic9 an ic n t /ana$e ; !r < &':
New ,ob !reates a new @ob. *pen ,ob "a5es a selected @ob current. .elete ,ob .eletes a selected @ob from data storage. ,ob Info Shows information about a current @ob.
P/N 7010-0492
2-1
Mana.in. 3obs
Ne= % &
The new @ob creation process is performed with the help of a Bi?ard.
indicates the directory in which this @ob will be created. The last specified file path is retained. To create a new @ob= &. In Name, enter a name for the @ob.
NOTICE
NOTICE
The %o& name len$th should not e'ceed () characters and contain any of the follo#in$ sym&ols*
R,STUVPWTXDYFZ>[\M]^_`;<aQb:c.
(. *ptionally, in Created by, enter any identifier of the person creating the @ob. -. *ptionally, in Comments, enter a description for the @ob. +. Current date displays the date and time when the @ob is being created. /. !lic5 0rowse if reOuired to save the New ,ob file in a folder
different from that
indicates.
1. !lic5 at this step if you want the new @ob to use the settings from the last opened @ob as the default settings. The new @ob becomes the current @ob, and the )ome menu displays with the @ob name in the title area. 3. !lic5 "e t to follow the wi?ard to complete the reOuired steps.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Clic+in$ durin$ any of the follo#in$ step creates the ne# ,o& #ith the settin$s that #ere confi$ured in all the previous steps -includin$ the opened one.. 4. Select the Survey Style or create a new configuration, and clic5 "e t. A Survey !onfiguration is a set of parameters that does not depend upon the @ob. A !onfiguration can be used by different ,obs. "ore... 7. !onfigure the Coordinate System settings reOuired for the @ob, and then clic5 "e t. "ore... &8. Specify the Units for the @ob, and then clic5 "e t. "ore... &&. !onfigure the Display parameters for coordinates, a?imuths and positions on roads, and then clic5 "e t. "ore... &(. Set Alarms for various situations. "ore...
&-. !lic5 to open the )ome menu for the newly created @ob. The title of the )ome menu will be the current @ob name. Bhen opening the @ob the !onnections screen displays by default.
Open % &
2pon starting, "A#N$T %ield always opens the last used @ob after the product activation and !onnections are performed. All e isting @obs that are created>opened with "A#N$T %ield are defined as .m#$ files and have the symbol To open an e isting @ob= .
&. %rom the ob Name list, highlight the name of the @ob you want to open. The Created and Modi!ied fields will display when the @ob was created and last modified.
will show the directory in which this @ob resides. 0y default the @ob files are stored in the ]program^Z,obs folder. (. !lic5 0rowse to navigate to the desired @ob in another folder if reOuired.
-. !lic5 to open the @ob. The )ome screen displays. To open @ob bac5ups of e isting @obs= &. !lic5 0rowse to navigate to the desired @ob. (. In the %ile Types drop'down list, select "A#N$T %ield ,ob 0ac5ups ;U.m@f.ba5<. -. )ighlight the name of the @ob to be opened, and clic5 To open a @ob that was created in TopS2RC= .
&. !lic5 0rowse to navigate to the desired @ob. (. In the %ile Types drop'down list, select TopS2RC ,ob %iles ;U.ts@< or TopS2RC ,ob 0ac5ups ;U.ts@.ba5<. -. )ighlight the name of the @ob to be opened, and clic5 .
2elete % &
Current ob" shows the name of the current @ob. To delete a @ob= &. %rom the ob Name list, highlight the name of the @ob you want to delete.
The Created and Modi!ied fields will display when the @ob was created and last modified.
will show the directory in which this @ob resides. 0y default the @ob files are stored in the ]program^Z,obs folder. (. !lic5 0rowse to navigate to the desired @ob in another folder if reOuired. -. !lic5 to delete the @ob. A confirmation message displays. +. !lic5 Ies to confirm deletion or No to cancel, and return to the ,ob folder.
NOTICE
NOTICE
/hen deletin$ a ,o&, MA NET !ield automatically deletes all associated files -the ,o& history file, ima$es, etc...
% & Inf
.isplays information about= d The current @ob in general d The settings in the @ob d The currently connected receiver= e Receiver firmware version e Receiver *A% e piration date ;for nearest e pired option<. !lic5 on this date to e pand a full list of *A% options.
6r ='e
The title of this dialog depends on the path from which it is called.
displays the path to the current folder where you will search for a desired file= &. 2se an icon to= move up a folder
create a new folder switch the display mode for the list of files to the detailed view switch the display mode for the list of files to the icon view (. %rom the Type drop'down list, select the type of files to display in the list for the current folder. -. In Name, enter the name of the file to select or select the desired file from the list.
C-a#te& 3
Confi.*&in. 3obs
!lic5 the Con$igure icon on the )ome screen to configure settings for the current @ob.
C nfi$!re f lder
Clic9 an ic n t c nfi$!re the 'ettin$':
Survey !reates or edits a survey configuration. !oordinate System Sets a coordinate system for the @ob. Allows #rid to #round transformation ;find out more...<. #lobal 9ogs the current @ob history to the file, and connects with the instrument at the startup prompt. 0ac5up !hanges the directory to save @ob bac5ups. 2nits Sets default units to be used in the @ob. .isplay !ustomi?es the interface to display data in the @ob.
P/N 7010-0492
3-1
Confi.*&in. 3obs
Alarms Sets alarm parameters. "enus Shows > hides functions in the menus. !odes Sets code global parameters. Sta5e Reports !onfigures reports for sta5ing. $nterprise !onfigures the user account to enter into the "A#N$T $nterprise.
C nfi$!rin$ a Ne= % &

Bhen creating a new @ob, a wi?ard guides you through all of the steps needed to setup the new @ob configuration. If reOuired to change the settings for the current @ob, use the options of the !onfigure folder.
Select S!r8e; C nfi$!rati n

Survey !onfiguration is a set of parameters that control a survey, define communication between devices, measure and store points. "A#N$T %ield contains some default configurations for different types of surveys with #NSS receivers and optical instruments. If the defaults do not suit your needs, you can create a new configuration for your survey. To do this, clic5 . Bhen you have created the new configuration, the name of this configuration will appear in the list. 3-2
Confi.*&in. a Ne4 3ob
To set a survey configuration for the @ob= d %rom the G#S$ Con!i% drop'down list of available configurations, select the reOuired configuration. d %rom the &ptical Con!i% drop'down list of available configurations, select the configuration for the Total Station or 9evel mode. d After selecting the survey configurations for your @ob, clic5
to store settings, which will be used each time you start a survey, and to return to the )ome screen.
NOTICE
NOTICE
0oth types of confi$urations can &e selected for one ,o&. They #ill &e used #ith the device selected upon Connections* Optical or PS1.
C nfi$!rati n'
The !onfigurations dialog presents a list of available survey configurations= names and types. Survey configurations are stored in the Styles'tsstyles file in the "A#N$T %ield directory. "agnet %ield contains a list of pre'defined configurations that you can use or modify. Iou can customi?e the list of the configurations to include only ones you need= d )ighlight the name of the configuration. d !lic5 the Delete button to remove the configuration from the list. d !lic5 the Edit button to change the highlighted configuration to suit your survey preferences. d !lic5 the Add button to create a new configuration. !reating > editing a survey configuration is accomplished with the help of a Bi?ard. %ind out more... on #PS: configurations and more... on optical configurations.
P/N 7010-0492
3-3
C
&.
rdinate S;'te/
To set the coordinate system for the ,ob= Select the #ro(ection to be used in the @ob. "A#N$T %ield has many pre'defined pro@ections and tabular pro@ections, which are selected during the "A#N$T %ield instalation. (. Use Grid)Ground to covert to ground coordinates if reOuired. -. Specify the Datum as reOuired. "A#N$T %ield has a lot of cataloged datums. +. Select the Geoid to bring to elevations if necessary. "A#N$T %ield has a lot of geoid files, which are selected on "A#N$T %ield instalation. %ind out more...
0nit'
Iou can set different units and precisions for how "A#N$T %ield will display various numerical values in dialogs= d .istance ;including area and volume< d Angle d !oordinate precision d Temperature and pressure *n the Distance tab, select as reOuired= d Distance unit for any length values. That can be "etersM I%eet ' ;& International ft c 8.-8+4 m<M 2S %eet ;& 2S survey ft c &(88> -7-3 m<M I%eet and Inches, 2S %eet and Inches ;the latter two are calculated by ta5ing into account that & ft c &( in<, I!hains ;& International ch c 11 International ft< or 2S!hains ;& 2S survey ch c 11 2S survey ft<.
NOTICE
NOTICE
If the selected units are 2Sfeet, linear values can &e entered as meters or I!eet &y appendin$ 3m3 or 3if3 to the entered value. If the selected units are in meters, then a linear value in 2S!eet or International feet can &e entered &y appendin$ 3f3 or 3if3 to the end of the entered value. If the selected units are in I!eet, linear values can &e entered as meters or 2Sfeet &y appendin$ 3m3 or 3f3 to the entered value. The appended characters 3m3, 3f3, or 3if3 are case insensitive. In other #ords, enter 3M3, 3!3, or 3I!3.
NOTICE
NOTICE
/hen usin$ I!eet and Inches or 2S !eet and Inches the follo#in$ format is o&served* f.ii', #here f is feet, ii is inches and ' is 456th of an inch. d Distance precision for the number of decimal places in length values.
NOTICE
NOTICE
To display only inte$ers, select 373 and so on. To display 8 decimal places, select 37.49):83. d Area unit for area values d *olume unit for volume values *n the An%le tab, select as reOuired= d An%le unit for angular values. That can be DMS, represented as ddd mm ss ;the full circle contains -18 degrees< or Grads +Gons, ' the full circle contains +88 grads ;gons<.
NOTICE
NOTICE
A;imuth can &e entered as t#o points separated &y 3<3, 3,3 or 3=3. Certain an$les can &e entered as three points
separated &y 3<3, 3,3 or 3=3. !or instance a value of 477<474 indicates the A;imuth from Point 477 to Point 474. d An%le precision for the number of decimal places in angular values. "ore... d C&G& an%le unit for angular values in !*#* tas5s. In addition to An%le unit settings, that also can be -adians ;the full circle contains (UPI radians<M or Mils ;& "il c & "illiradian c &>&888 of a Radian< d C&G& an%le precision for the number of decimal places in angular values in !*#* tas5s. "ore... *n the Coordinate tab, select as reOuired= d Nort.in%)Eastin% precision for the number of decimal places in Northing>$asting coordinates. "ore... d /at)/on precision for the number of decimal places in latitude> longitude seconds. d 0ei%.t precision for the number of decimal places in ellipsoidal heights and elevations. "ore... *n the &t.er tab, select if necessary= d Temperature unit only for the raw measurements. That can be !elsius ;!< or %ahrenheit ;%<. d #ressure unit only for the raw measurements. That can be mm)g, hPa, in)g or mbar.
2i'pla;
Iou can configure the display of the following settings= d Coordinate Type to view coordinates for the coordinate system selected d Coordinate &rder to display= Northing>$asting>)eight or $asting>Northing>)eight, A>I>E or I>A>E
d A1imut. &ri%in to display the a?imuth computed from either reference directions= North, South, $ast, or Best d Disp Dir As to view directions as bearings or a?imuths d Disp C/ #os As to display stations or chainages ;distance along the centerline< for stationing the centerline d Full Station to set one full station that was always &88 units traditionally %or e ample, when using &88 m as a full station, a position at the distance of -+&.(/1 m ;chainage< from station 8 : 88 is designated : +&.(/1. The numbers to the left of the plus are hundreds of meters ;even full stations< and to the right of the plus are tens and units of meters to the nearest 8.88& m ;a remainder of a station<.
Alar/'
Iou can configure alert conditions= d *n the "ain tab, chec5 Audible Alarm to enable audible alarms. The alert will sound automatically when an alert situation occurs. d *n the !ontroller tab, place chec5 mar5s in the #ower Alarm and Memory Alarm bo es to select the alert conditions of low power and memory in the controller. d *n the #PS: tab, place chec5 mar5s in the #ower Alarm and Memory Alarm2 -adio /in3 and Fi45Float bo es to select the alert conditions of low power and memory, poor radio lin5 and loss of initiali?ation in the #NSS receiver. d *n the *ptical tab, place chec5 mar5s in the #ower Alarm and Trac3 bo es to select the alert conditions of low power and loss of the target in automatic trac5ing mode for optical instruments.
GPS S!r8e; C nfi$!rati n'

To create a new configuration= &. $nter the Name for the configuration that will be displayed in the !onfigurations list. (. Select the survey Type that depends on the eOuipment you will use and the results you need to obtain. "A#N$T %ield provides configurations for the following #PS: survey types= d RT 6 d Networ5 RT6 d Networ5 .#PS d Real Time .#PS d #eneric N"$A d PP Static d PP 6inematic d PP .#PS -. %rom the Corrections drop'down list, select the type of correction data that will be used for survey if the Networ5 RT6, RT .#PS, or Networ5 .#PS survey type is chosen. +. If reOuired to log rover data for post'processing in a real'time survey, select and enable the #ost #rocessin% bo . /. !lic5 "e t. The wi?ard will set default parameters specific for the eOuipment selected.
1ecei8er Ma9e
Set general conditions for the survey and clic5 "e t= d To access #PS real'time surveys and sta5e routines without using real hardware, select the Simulation mode chec5 bo . d In the -over field, designate the Manu!acturer of the rover receiver, "A#N$T %ield supports Topcon and So55ia.
GP) )*&$e, Confi.*&ations
d In the Base field, designate the Manu!acturer of the base receiver, if reOuired. d Select the #ost #rocessin% chec5 bo to store raw observations and process them later.
1T3 S!r8e;
Real'Time 6inematic survey implies use of a pair of receivers operating simultaneously and a radio lin5 established between the two receivers. %rom a functional point of view, the two receivers will differ from each other. *ne of the receivers ;a 0ase< is located at a fi ed point with 5nown coordinates. The base receiver will transmit the data via a radio lin5 to the other receiver ;a Rover< to compute differential corrections. To establish a proper connection between the two receivers, specify the necessary communication parameters first. To configure an RT6 survey= d !onfigure the base receiver d !onfigure the base radio d !onfigure the rover receiver d !onfigure the rover radio
6a'e 1ecei8er
To configure the base receiver= &. %rom the -eceiver Model list, select the model of the receiver you are using as the base. Note= Topcon Generic selection will wor5 with all receiver models including #R'- but some functionality, li5e automatic S0AS satellites trac5ing, will not be accessible. (. The E4t' -eceiver bo is always chec5ed and is enabled for devices that have internal receivers. The connection for e ternal receivers can be Bluetoot. and Serial. -. Set Elevation Mas3. 2sually the default &- degrees is appropriate. .ata from satellites below this elevation will not be used.
Confi.*&in. 3obs
+. %rom -T6 Format, select the format for the differential corrections data transmitted by the base radio. /. %rom the Antenna drop'down list, select the type of the antenna used at the base. 1. Set the Antenna 0ei%.t and height type. The height type can be either *ertical when the height is measured to an ARP ;the antenna reference point, usually the middle bottom of the antenna< or Slant when the height is measured to the antenna edge. 3. !lic5 #erip.erals to enable the "ultiple Ports option if needed to transmit data from different ports of the base receiver to peripherals. 4. *ptionally, you can turn off the charger mode for the receiverDP-7Ms internal battery if it is available. To do this, select the -eceiver Settin%s option from the pop'up menu that
displays by clic5ing in the top left corner. "ore... 7. *ptionally, you can set relative calibrations for the base antenna' To do this, clic5 Use relative calibrations in the pop'
up menu ;the chec5 will appear near the option name<. The default is the use of absolute calibrations. All antenna calibrations are referenced to the ARP. Iou can find details on antenna calibrations at the N#S site here. &8. !lic5 "e t.
6a'e Peripheral'
Select the Multiple #orts chec5 bo , and then select the number of ports to use for base output if reOuired. Additional dialogs will appear later in the wi?ard seOuence to setup parameters for each port.
31010
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
1ecei8er Settin$'
Bhen an e ternal power supply is used at the base, and the receiver charger mode is turned on, it supplies power to the receiver battery. Iou can an e ternal power supply without charging the receiver battery. To do this= &. Select the Turn C.ar%er Mode &!! chec5 bo .
(. !lic5
to save the setting.
1adi
Radio modems are used in #PS real'time surveys. The base radio is intended for transmitting differential correcions and the rover radio is used for receiving them. Also, there can be some radios that may be configured for output N"$A messages if reOuired. To configure the radio= &. Select the -adio Modem type from the list of pre'defined modem types. The list contents depends upon the survey configuration and the receiver model selected. Note= %or a Networ5 survey, in the Networ3 Type field, select either e isting networ5 connection or dialup. (. If you use a Air9in5 !."A or #PRS radio modem, select the Modem -e%ister option from the pop'up menu that displays by
clic5ing in the top left corner to register the radio modem. "ore... -. *ptionally, you can configure R$'S& Repeater for the rover radio. To do this, select the Con!i% -E5S7 -epeater option from
the pop'up menu that displays by clic5 corner. "ore...

P/N 7010-0492
in the top left 31111
Confi.*&in. 3obs
+. Specify communication parameters for the receiver #ort that the radio is connected to= #arity2 the number of Data bits2 Baud rate2 the number of Stop bits, which are specific to the connected modem. /. If reOuired, clic5 De!aults to return all the communication parameters to the default settings. 1. !lic5 "e t to specify the Radio Parameters.
M de/ 1e$i'ter
Air9in5 #PRS and Air9in5 !."A reOuire registration. To register the modem= &. Select #rovider' (. $nter -e%ister 8n!ormation= Net 8D, #assword and #.one Number' -. !lic5 the De!aults button to set the default data. +. !lic5 the -e%ister button to pass registration.
1adi
Para/eter'
Specify parameters for the radio selected= d Air9in5 #PRS, !."A, !.P.&, !."A(888, #eneric, Sierra Bireless "P(88 !.P. modem types do not reOuire setting any parameters for the base radio. d *ther modems reOuire additional parameters to be set.
%or more information see= Air9in5 !."A;"2.P< .igital 2)% %)7&/Plus Internal Satel Internal )iPer 9ite Radio Pacific !rest 2)% Satel
31212
!ellular "odem Internal !."A Rover Air9in5 !."A Rover Air9in5 !.P. Rover Air9in5 #PRS Rover Internal !."A 6a'e M!ltica't
To set IP addresses for communication between the base and several rovers using 2.P protocol= &. In the Address to Add field, enter the IP address as reOuired. (. !lic5 Add to add the IP address to the list. The 8# Addresses list displays all IP addresses available. -. !lic5 Delete to delete any address from the list.
Cell Ph ne
To set phone information= &. %or the base radio, enter the Base #8N. (. %or the rover radio, enter the -over #8N and the Base #.one Number that can be added to a #.one number list'
2i$ital 0HF
To set parameters for the .igital 2)% radio= &. Select the -evision type of digital 2)% radio used= either Di%ital U0F or Di%ital U0F 88. (. Select an appropriate operation #rotocol for data transmitting> receiving= d Simple4 is the default. This is ArBestJs proprietary protocol. It only wor5s with other ArBest ;.igital 2)%< radios. d Trimble wor5s with Trimble Trim Tal5 and Trim "ar5 Radios. d #D/ wor5s with e isting P.9 radios and )iper ATs set in P.9 mode.
P/N 7010-0492
31313
Confi.*&in. 3obs
-. Select the type of Modulation for the radio modem. Select either .0PS6>.NPS6 if using the Simple protocol or #"S6 if using Trimble or P.9. +. Select the channel Spacin% step= either &(./ or (/ 5)? or .o not set ;the default<. This is a hardware set. /. $nable>.isable Scramblin%= either Set up ;the default< or .onJt set up. Bhen set up, it provides more robust data communication over high interference areas.
FH.1* Pl!'
To set parameters for the %)7&/ Plus radio= &. Select the /ocation to ad@ust the freOuency range and R% power level depending on the country. (. Set the operation #rotocol. Select %)7&/ $ t if all receivers on the @obsite are eOuipped with %)7&/Plus radios. -. Set the C.annel number. This feature allows up to ten simultaneously transmitting radio modems, without interference, at the @ob site ;& is the default<.
Int Satel Par/'

To set parameters for the internal Satel radio= &. Select Satel FCS &n ;default<, or Satel FCS &!!. In %ree !hannel Scan mode, the radio modem will regularly scan the current operating freOuency and under certain conditions it can switch to the ne t freOuency. (. *r select #D/ ;Pac!rest< operation protocol.
Internal HiPer 4ite

Set the C.annel number. This feature allows up to five simultaneously transmitting radio modems, without interference, at the @ob site ;& is the default<.
Pacific Cre't 1adi
Par/'
To set parameters for the Pacific !rest radio=
31414
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
&. Select the C.annel number from 8 to &/. (. Set the Sensitivity of the radio to /ow, Medium or 0i%.2 or turn it &!!'
0HF M de/
To set parameters for the internal 2)% radio= &. Select the compatibility #rotocol. (. Set the C.annel number. -. Select the output #ower value for the base radio.
Satel 1adi
Par/'
To set parameters for the Satel radio= &. Select the Model of the Satel modem. (. Select the C.annel number. Fre9uency displays the corresponding value for the channel number selected. -. If reOuired, set #CC Mode ;Pacific !rest !orporation<. +. In FEC2 select if you want to use %orward $rror !orrection techniOue to ma imi?e data communication.
1 8er C2MA Par/'

Set IP address for communication between the rover and the base. &. $nter the !."A address of the base radio in the Base CDMA Address field. (. Press %&& to add the address to the 8# Addresses list.
1 8er C2P2 Par/'

To set the IP address for communication between the rover and the base. &. $nter the !.P. address of the base radio in the Base CD#D Address field. (. Press %&& to add the address to the 8# Addresses list.
P/N 7010-0492
31010
Confi.*&in. 3obs
1 8er GP1S Par/'

To set the IP address for communication between the rover and the base. &. $nter the #PRS address of the base in the Base G#-S Address field. (. Press %&& to add the address to the 8# addresses list.
1 8er 1ecei8er
To configure the rover receiver= &. %rom the -eceiver Model list, select the model of the receiver you are using as the rover. Note= Topcon Generic selection will wor5 with all receiver models including #R'- but some functionality, li5e automatic S0AS satellites trac5ing, will not be accessible. (. The E4t' -eceiver bo is always chec5ed and unavailable for every receiver model in the Receiver "odel list e cept #RS' &. "A#N$T %ield directly installed on the #RS'& can use #RS'&Js internal #PS receiver. -. Set an Elevation Mas3. Typically the default &- degrees is appropriate for the base and rover. Satellites below this elevation will not be considered. +. %rom -T6 Format, select the format for the differential corrections data transmitted by the rover radio. /. In Networ5 survey, set the #rotocol for data transmission= NT-8#, direct TC#)8#2 or CSD technology. 1. %rom the Antenna drop'down list, select the correct antenna type used on the rover side. 3. To set the default antenna height, enter a value in the Antenna 0ei%.t field. The height type can be set to either *ertical when the height is measured to an ARP ;the antenna reference point, usually the middle bottom of the antenna< or Slant when the height is measured to the antenna edge. 4. !lic5 #erip.erals to enable options to configure selected peripherals in the dialogs later. "ore... 31111
7. *ptionally, you can turn off the charger mode for the receiverJs internal battery. To do this, select the -eceiver Settin%s option
from the pop'up menu that displays by clic5ing top left corner. "ore... &8. *ptionally, you can instruct the rover to use relative calibrations on the base' To do this, clic5 -elative calibrations
in the
on base in the pop'up menu ;the chec5 will appear near the option name<. The default is the use of absolute calibrations. All antenna calibrations are referenced to the ARP. Iou can find details on Antenna !alibrations at the N#S site here. &&. In Networ5 RT6 survey you can set a fi ed position for ##A message from the rover receiver' To do this, clic5 Use !i4ed GGA position in the pop'up menu to enable and Set !i4ed GGA position. "ore...
P 'iti n f r GGA
If reOuired, set a fi ed position for ##A message from the rover receiver. Iou can do this in one of the following ways= &. !lic5 the Map selection button and select the point on the map. The point position values appear in the coordinate fields. (. !lic5 the /ist selection button and select the point in the list. The point position values appear in the coordinate fields. -. $nter the coordinate values in the edit fields.
1E"S1 FH.1* 1epeater

If reOuired, the R$'S& modem can be used as a stand'alone repeater to increase the range between the 0ase and Rover in spread spectrum systems.
P/N 7010-0492
31717
Confi.*&in. 3obs
To configure the R$'S& Repeater= &. Select the Enable -E5S7 -epeater con!i%uration chec5 bo to enable further configuration of the R$'S& as a repeater. (. %rom Connect Type, select the type of connection of the repeater= either to the -eceiver or to the Controller to setup the modem. -. In Connect #ort Setup set the properties of the connection port. Press De!aults to set the port properties to the default values. +. Press Ne t and configure the modem parameters= d Select the /ocation to ad@ust the freOuency range and R% power level depending on the country. d Set the operation #rotocol. d Set the C.annel number. This feature allows up to ten simultaneously transmitting radio modems, without interference, at the @ob site ;& is the default<.
1 8er 1ecei8er Peripheral'

If reOuired, select any options to wor5 with peripherals= &. Select the NMEA #orts chec5 bo to configure the output of the N"$A messages. Select the number of ports from the drop'
down list that appears and clic5 . Additional dialogs will appear later in the wi?ard seOuence to setup parameters for each port and specify N"$A messages for output. "ore... (. Select the Multiple #orts chec5 bo to configure multibase input for the rover. Select the number of ports from the drop'
down list that appears and clic5 . Additional dialogs will appear later in the wi?ard seOuence to setup parameters for each port. Note= 2se only one radio to receive corrections from the base.
31515
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
-. Select the mmG#S$ chec5 bo to configure the mm#PS: system. !lic5 #arameters to specify them. "ore... Select the E4ternal /aser chec5 bo to configure the laser device that can be connected either directly to the Controller or through the -eceiver. !lic5 #arameters to specify them. "ore...
O!tp!t NMEA
To configure the NMEA Messa%es for output= &. Select the chec5 bo es near the types of messages as reOuired. "ore... (. Select the Set G# as -eceiver Tal3er 8D chec5 bo to instruct the receiver to use F#PF as Tal5er I. in appropriate N"$A sentences generated. This enables support of #oggle "aps that cannot recogni?e default F#NF or F#9F as Tal5er I.s in these messages. -. $nter the 8nterval in seconds at which you want the messages to be output ;up to 8.& sec<.
4i't
f NMEA /e''a$e'
The following NMEA Messa%es are available for output= d GSA to output the operation mode of the #NSS receiver, the satellite used for positioning, and .*P. d G// to output data on the current latitude>longitude and positioning mode. d *TG to output the traveling direction and velocity. d G-S to output the residual error of distance for each satellite. This is used to support RAI". d :DA to output the 2T!, day, month, year, and local time ?one. d GST to output the statistics of position errors. d GNS to output data on time, position, and positioning of #PS:#9*NASS ;#NSS<. d GGA to output data on time, position, and positioning.
P/N 7010-0492
31919
Confi.*&in. 3obs
d GS* to output the number of satellites, satellite number, elevation angle, a?imuthal angle, and SNR. d 0DT to output the direction ;heading<. d #;ATT to output attitude parameters. d -MC to output time, date, position, course and speed data provided by a #NSS navigation receiver. d -&T to output rate of turn. d GM# to output #NSS map pro@ection fi data.
//GPS>
In mm#PS aided RT6 survey, a wireless sensor connected to the Rover pic5s up the signals from the laser transmitter for accurate ;millimeter< elevations.
NOTICE
NOTICE
/hen measurin$ the hei$ht of the >over antenna, include the hei$ht of the sensor #ith a 856 inch plu$. To configure the mm#PS:= &. Select the -eceiver port2 which is connected to the mm#PS: Sensor. (. Select the Sensor Gain to ad@ust the gain on the mm#PS: Sensor. Select Auto to automatically control the mm#PS receiverJs detection level of the transmitterJs signal. -. $nter the 0ei%.t Di!!erence /imit value to set the threshold for the difference between #PS and mm#PS: height measurements. If the #PS: height and mm#PS: height differ by more than the amount entered, the mm#PS: icon will change to warn the user.
4a'er C nfi$!rati n
To configure the E4ternal /aser instrument connected to the -eceiver or to the Controller=
32020
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
&. Select the laser Manu!acturer. !urrently we support ".9 and 9aser Technology, Inc. (. Select the Model of the 9aser Instrument. -. Select the Type of laser measurement system if it uses $ncoding or not. +. Set /aser #ort Settin% including port, parity, data, baud and stop rates to connect to the 9aser Instrument.
S!r8e; Para/eter'
The survey parameters are associated with the type of the survey. To set the parameters that will be used during a survey= &. %rom the Solution Type drop'down list, select the solution type for each position computation in a real'time survey as reOuired. .ata will be considered only if the solution type satisfies this selection. Bhat is displayed in the list for selection depends on the type of selected survey. There can be a combination of the following solution types= d Fi4ed mmG#S$= indicates that the positions were %i ed *nly solution with mm#PS: calculated height. d Fi4ed &nly= indicates that positions were computed by RT6 engine using the carrier phase measurements from 0ase and Rover receivers. Integer ambiguities were fi ed. d Float mmG#S$= indicates that the positions were %loat solution with mm#PS: calculated height. d Float= indicates that the positions were computed by RT6 engine using the carrier phase measurements from base and rover receivers. Integer ambiguities, however, were N*T fi ed ;their float estimates were used instead<. d DG#S= indicates that the positions were achieved using the pseudo'range measurements from base and rover receivers. d All= indicates that the positions were computed using all the epochs accepted, including autonomous solutions.
d Auto= indicates autotonomous positions when differential corrections are not available. (. In the Auto Accept field, set the following parameters for auto' storing positions in a stationary survey= d Select the Num Meas to Av% chec5 bo and, if it is to be used in the logging, in the edit field enter the number of measurements reOuired before a point can be saved. The default is -. d Select the #recision chec5 bo and, if they are ta5en into account, in the edit fields enter the hori?ontal and vertical acuuracy in meters reOuired before a point can be saved. The defaults are 8.8&/ m and 8.8-8 m, respectively. d Note= If both the chec5 bo es are chec5ed, both these conditions must be satisfied before the point is saved. -. In the Auto Topo field, set the following parameters for auto storing positions in the dynamic survey= d %rom the Met.od drop'down list, select the method for setting the interval between the received epochs= by time, by hori?ontal distance, or by slope distance. d In the 8nterval edit field enter the value of this interval.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Every survey parameter can &e chan$ed #ith the help of the Settin$s &utton from any Survey screen in PS1 mode.
Sta9e !t Para/eter'
To set the parameters that will be used during a #PS sta5eout= &. In the 01 Dist Tolerance edit field, enter the hori?ontal distance tolerance value. This is used to determine when you are close enough to the point for the bullseye to show up. (. %rom the -e!erence Direction drop'down list, select the reference direction that will be used in point sta5eout. It can be
North, moving direction, or the direction to the reference point ;a?imuth<. -. %rom the Solution Type drop'down list, select the solution type to filter the type of solutions that will be used for the sta5eout. There can be a combination of the following solution types= d Fi4ed mmG#S$= indicates that the positions were %i ed *nly solution with mm#PS: calculated height. d Fi4ed &nly= indicates that positions were computed by RT6 engine using the carrier phase measurements from 0ase and Rover receivers. Integer ambiguities were fi ed. d Float mmG#S$= indicates that the positions were %loat solution with mm#PS: calculated height. d Float= indicates that the positions were computed by RT6 engine using the carrier phase measurements from base and rover receivers. Integer ambiguities, however, were N*T fi ed ;their float estimates were used instead<. d DG#S= indicates that the positions were achieved using the pseudo'range measurements from base and rover receivers. d All= indicates that the positions were computed using all the epochs accepted, including autonomous solutions. d Auto= indicates autotonomous positions when differential corrections are not available. +. In the Auto Accept field, set the following parameters for the auto'storing of sta5ed points= d Select the Num Meas to Av% bo if reOuired to use the number of measurements to average before logging a point. The default is -. If you want to enter your own number, enter the value in the field. d Select the #recision bo if reOuired to ta5e into account the hori?ontal and vertical precision tolerances for #PS vector in meters that should be met before a point is saved. The defaults are 8.8&/ m and 8.8-8 m, respectively. If you want to enter your own precision tolerances, enter the values in the fields.
NOTICE
NOTICE
If &oth the &o'es are chec+ed, &oth these conditions must &e satisfied &efore the point is saved. /. Select the Display option from the pop'up menu that appears by
clic5ing in the top left corner of the dialog if reOuired to specify an icon for the sta5ed point. "ore... 1. !lic5 "e t to set the parameters for storing sta5ed points in the Store Sta3ed #oint As fields= d The #oint name can be set to the design point, ne t point, design point with a predefined prefi , design point with a predefined suffi . "ore... d The Note can be set to the design point, design point with a prefi or design point with a suffi . "ore...
2efinin$ na/e' f r the 'ta9ed p int'

The Point name can be set to either design point name, ne t point name, design point with a pre'defined prefi ;that is, st5f8&, where Gst5fH is the prefi <, or design point with a pre'defined suffi . The choice of the prefi or suffi appears only when the corresponding item is chosen from the drop'down menu. Also, a specified numerical constant can be added to automatically generate the sta5ed point name. %or instance, if the constant specified is &888, and the design point is &88, the sta5ed point would be named &&88 ;that is, &88:&888<. If the design point is alphanumeric, the constant is appended to the name. %or e ample, for the design point A9P)A, the corresponding sta5ed out point is named A9P)A&888.
Settin$ n te' f r the 'ta9ed p int'

The Note can be set to either design point name, design point with a prefi , or design point with a suffi . Also, it can be Station D *ffset information. If the Station D *ffset option is activated, an edit bo for entering an alphanumeric prefi appears. %or the 2nited States, this
prefi is GStaH, for the international mar5ets the prefi is G!haH, and for the 6orean>,apanese mar5ets the prefi is GNoH. Bith this option activated, depending on the choice for the prefi , "A#N$T %ield automatically generates one note for each sta5eout point= Sta/:/./R/.8, !ha/8/./R/.8, or No./:/./R/.8 respectively.
Sta9ed P int Ic n
To define the icon for sta5ed points to display on the map= &. Select the Use icon !or sta3ed point bo to enable settings. (. In the Sta3ed #oint field= d %rom the 8con drop'down list select the icon appearance that will be reflected it in the window. d In the Color field press the icon in the dialog. "ore... button to set the color for the
C l r Palette
This palette allows you to select the color for the ob@ects to be displayed on the map. To do this= &. !lic5 on the bo of the desired color to highlight it. (. !lic5 the o5 button to return to the Sta5ed Point Icon dialog to view the colored icon.
Ad8anced Para/eter'
This dialog allows you to change advanced signal processing parameters= d The Satellite System to use from the default G#S and G/&NASS to G#S only. d %rom -T6 #osition, the method of RT6 corrections definition= E4trapolation or Matc.ed Epoc. ;sometimes described as asynchronous or synchronous, respectively<.
d Select the Trac3 /<C Satellites chec5 bo to enable 9(! signal trac5ing. d Select the Trac3 /= Satellites chec5 bo to enable 9/ signal trac5ing. d 0y default the Multipat. -eduction is selected to enable the use of a special signal processing techniOue for reduction of !>A code phase multipath. d Select the Co5&p Trac3in% chec5 bo to involve additional resources for acOuisition of the signal, phase' and delay'loc5 loops. d Select the Canopy Environment chec5 bo to allow the RT6 engine to use less rigid thresholds when filtering out measurement outliers. This mode is recommended when wor5ing under tree canopy or in other cases of high multipath. d %rom the Base Station Ma3e drop'down list, select the manufacture of the 0ase receiver to designate 0ase "a5e ;I#S !lass< used by Rover receiver to account for #9*NASS biases. e Select &t.er for the base receiver of other class that is included in the I#S list. e Select Un3nown for the base receiverJs class that is not included in the I#S list. e 0y default, it is set to Automatic Detection to override 0ase "a5e automatically detected by the Rover receiver if this information is transmitted by the 0ase.
NOTICE
NOTICE
This option re"uires Topcon receiver f5# at rover ).: or hi$her. d Select the -T6 Settin%s option from the pop'up menu that
appears by clic5ing in the top left corner of the dialog if reOuired to set more advanced parameters. "ore...
Mi'cellane !' ?GPS@ Para/eter'

The "iscellaneous dialog is used to customi?e the user interface= d Display coordinates a!ter measurement= when selected ;by default<, computed coordinates are displayed automatically after a #PS measurement is performed and before the point coordinates are stored into the database. d #rompt !or antenna .ei%.t= when selected ;by default<, prompts for a height of the antenna before a point is stored. d Beep on storin% points= by default this is turned on to beep each time the point is stored. d Auto5connect to server= when selected ;by default<, an automatic connection to the server is established in a Networ5 survey. d C.ec3 si%nal 9uality= select the bo to chec5 the signal Ouality for the radio lin5 in a Networ5 survey. d Auto5disconnect !rom server= when selected ;by default<, an automatic disconnection from the server is performed in a Networ5 survey.
1T3 Settin$'
This dialog allows you to set the following parameters to govern the RT6 engine= d Ambi%uity /evel= this three'state parameter is a simplified version of a float ambiguity fi indicator the RT6 engine uses when fi ing integer ambiguities. /ow, Medium and 0i%. selection correspond to the indicatorYs 7/T, 77./T and 77.7T thresholds, respectively. The higher the confidence level specified, the longer the integer ambiguity search time. d -esolution #eriod= defines the interval in seconds for 0ase Transmission > Rover Reception period at which the ambiguities estimation is performed. d E4pected Correction= sets the differential correction update interval for the base station, effective only in the RT6 "atched
$poch mode. The value should be set to the e act rate during which the base station transmits differential correction data. This parameter will instruct the rover receiver to output the RT6 position at the same rate at which differential corrections are updated.
Net= r9 1T3
Networ5 Real Time 6inematic is similar to RT 6 survey but implies that the Rover uses RT6 correction data received from operating reference station networ5s to compute its position. TodayJs operating reference station networ5s are creating various sets of data. To configure the Networ5 RT6 = &. Name the configuration, and select the Networ3 -T6 type in the Survey dialog. (. Select the desired Corrections type= d *-S e to receive Cirtual Reference Station data. d MAC eto use "aster'Au iliary !oncept data. d F6# e to use networ5 area corrections. d Sin%le Base e to receive RT6 corrections from a single base. d E4ternal Con!i% e when the receiver uses an $ ternal program to configure RT6 corrections. -. !onfigure the Rover Receiver. As reOuired, select one of the following protocols from the #rotocol drop'down list. d NT-8# e select to receive RT6 corrections from the Internet through NTRIP !aster. Iou have to obtain the user name and password for NTRIP server. d TC#)8# e select to receive RT6 corrections from the Internet. d CSD Data e select to use the !S. form of data transmission to receive RT6 corrections via a cellular phone. +. *n the "odem !onnect dialog select the device the modem is connected to.
Net4o&6 7T8
/. %or internet connection, enter the settings in the "odem Internet Info dialog. If needed, Select the 2se #P2I. bo to turn on the method of #P2I. authori?ation. 1. %or server connection, enter the user name and password in the 9ogin Info dialog. 3. $nter dialup information in the "odem .ialup Info dialog if reOuired. 4. Select a virtual radio port for data input in the "odem Receiver Info dialog. 7. %or radios connected to the Receiver, configure the receiver port for connection and the Rover Radio parameters.
M de/ C nnect
To configure the modem connection= &. Select -eceiver if the modem is connected with the receiver. (. Select Controller if the modem is connected with the controller.
M de/ 2ial!p Inf

To set parameters for a dialup internet connection= &. $nter the Dialup Number needed to ma5e the internet connection. (. $nter the User 8D for the server. -. $nter the #assword to login to the server with the entered user id. +. $nter the #8N number for the server. /. To set the values to default, clic5 the De!aults button.
M de/ Internet Inf

To enter information for internet connection= &. $nter an internet Address that will be used for the connection in the 8# or >eb format ;select the radio button as reOuired<. (. If reOuired, enter a Name for the address which displays in the address list'
Confi.*&in. 3obs
-. Press %&& "e' to add the address to the Address list' New IP> Beb addresses>ports can be deleted or added to the list. +. Press (p&ate to update the address in the address list. /. Iou can select an address by double'clic5ing on it in the list.
4 $in Inf
$nter your User 8D and #assword to login to the server with these credentials.
M de/ 1ecei8er Inf

The *irtual -adio #ort for AI" ;Advanced Input "ode< is automatically selected from the following default values=
Product Cirtual port ;0T connection< 0 . A ! A Cirtual port ;!able connection< 0 0 . . .
#R')iper )iper II #RS'& #RA&
Net= r9 2GPS
Networ5 .ifferential #PS implies the usage of pseudorange corrections received from operating differential #PS reference station networ5s. The configuration of the Networ5 .#PS survey type is similar to Networ5 RT6. The difference is that "A! data is not used and .#PS solutions are derived from Networ5 .#PS survey ;see Survey Parameters<.
33030
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
1eal Ti/e 2GPS

Real Time .ifferential #PS implies that the rover receiver uses differential pseudorange correction data transmitted from .#PS services. Real Time .#PS survey is used in #IS applications. A number of differential services e ist to transmit differential correctional data, including maritime radio beacons, geostationary satellites ;as with the *mniSTAR service<, and S0AS ;Satellite' 0ased Augmentation Systems< service. To configure Real Time .#PS= &. Name the configuration and select the -eal Time DG#S>NMEA type in the Survey dialog. (. Select the Corrections type to receive .#PS correction data from one source of differencial corrections as reOuired and also enabled for the receiver. -. In Receiver "a5e, select the manufacturer for the rover receiver= Topcon or So55ia. Note= Bhen SBAS)Autonomous correction type is selected, #eneric N"$A will appear in the "anufacturer drop'down selection list. +. !onfigure the Rover Receiver. /. !onfigure the appropriate parameters for the differential source selected= d User Base configuration is similar to RT 6 d 0eacon d S0AS>Autonomous d CDG#S ;!anadian nation'wide .#PS service<, specify communication parameters for the receiver #ort that the CDG#S radio is connected to= #arity2 the number of Data bits2 Baud rate2 the number of Stop bits. d *mniSTAR'C0S or *mniSTAR')P
C nfi$: 6eac n
To configure settings for a radio beacon source for differential #PS corrections= &. Select the Country where the radio'beacon based differential service is located. (. Select the Station that provides broadcasting differential corrections for the rover. -. Select the Beacon Corrections !rom B-57 chec5 bo if reOuired to use the beacon receiver 0R'& as a source of differential corrections for the rover. +. Select the Automatic Scan Mode chec5 bo if you want to enable this mode in 0R'& to get the 0eacon signal automatically. 0R'& will search broadcasting freOuencies and output RT!" corrections from the best signal.
S6AS Set!p
This dialog contains settings for the Satellite'0ased Augmentation Systems ;BAAS, $#N*S, or "SAS< source of differential correction data. The availability of satellite signals depends upon the receiver type and location. To configure S0AS= &. %or #R'- and other new receivers that support automatic trac5ing, you can select one of two options for use of S0AS satellites= Best Available or Custom. Note = If the Topcon #eneric receiver was selected in the Rover Receiver dialog, custom setup is reOuired. Not more than two S0AS satellites can be enabled for trac5ing in Topcon #eneric receiver. (. %or custom selection, Select the bo es near the PRN numbers of the satellites as reOuired. Note= All satellites can be selected. The satellite most available from those selected will be used in .#PS solution. d PRN P, Name and Type= These columns will list all possible S0AS PRN numbers with the respective names of the satellites and types of satellite systems.
d #PS P= This PRN P applies only to the Topcon #eneric receiver. *ne of currently unused #PS numbers should be selected in this column to be able to trac5 this satellite in Satellite Ciew dialog. To change, clic5 #PS number and select the appropriate number from the pop'up menu. -. $nable>disable use of ionospheric corrections from the S0AS satellite when computing positions. It is recommended to use ionospheric corrections. d None= ionospheric corrections are not used d Apply i! avail= use ionospheric corrections if available d Use sat only i! avail= use only the satellites for which ionospheric corrections are available.
C nfi$: O/niSTA1
%or *mniSTAR'C0S and *mniSTAR')P ;a wide'area, satellite delivered, differential Cirtual 0ase Station and )igh Performance #PS services<, select the name of the Satellite to be used. The availability of satellite signals depends upon the receiver type and location.
Generic NMEA
"A#N$T %ield supports Real Time .#PS survey on Topcon controllers with internal N"$A'standard #PS receivers ;e cept #RS&<. Generic NMEA configuration only implies reception of .#PS correction data from an S0AS system. To configure this survey type= &. Name the configuration, and select the -eal Time DG#S>NMEA type in the Survey dialog. (. Select SBAS)Autonomous in the !orrections drop'down list. -. In Receiver "a5e, select Generic NMEA in the "anufacturer drop'down list. +. !onfigure the Rover Receiver. The Receiver "odel will be set to Generic NMEA and Antenna to Un3nown. /. !onfigure S0AS>Autonomous parameters.
PP Static
Post Processing Static survey is a post'processed survey using raw #PS data collected by two or more receivers at stationary occupations for a long period of time. In the office, the software operator processes the data collected in the field and calculates the relative position of the receivers. .ifferential processing ta5es place when data from two or more receivers are processed together in order to compute the receivers relative position. If the coordinates of one receiver are 5nown, then the coordinates of the other can be calculated. To configure the PP Static survey for one static recever= &. Name the configuration, and select the ## Static type in the Survey dialog. (. Select the receiver vendor in the Receiver "a5e dialog. -. !onfigure Static Receiver. +. $nter information for the raw data logging in the PP Setup dialog. /. !onfigure the *ccupation Times.
PP Set!p
$nter information for the raw data logging. d File name" Select if the name of the receiver file is to be set automatically or by you. %or the user'defined, the corresponding dialog bo will display at the logging start. d /o% To" Iou can log only to the -eceiver. Note= In PP .#PS survey, the raw data logging to the Controller is allowed. d /o%%in% -ate" Select the logging interval in seconds during which data is logged to the file. The default depends on the survey type. d Start /o% = *nly for the rover PP setup in PP'enabled surveys, you can select Manual or Automatic to start logging.
d /o% corrections= *nly for the rover PP setup in PP'enabled standard and Networ5 RT6 survey ;right now for !ontroller modem connection only<, you can Select this bo to allow logging additional chec5out information about RT6 mode for software developers.
Occ!pati n A InitialiBati n Ti/e'

This dialog contains timing settings for receiver loggings, used in automatic mode during a PP Survey. Note= The occupation times vary based on the number of satellites and the number of receiver freOuencies. A minimum of four satellites is reOuired. Select the 8nitiali1ation time in minutes to define initiali?ation times. #enerally the default settings are appropriate.
PP 3ine/atic
Post Processing 6inematic implies two receivers. *ne is fi ed, the other is moving along some tra@ectory li5e in RT 6. The processing of the collected data is performed later, the same as it is for the PP Static type.
PP 2GPS
Post Processing .ifferential #PS implies that the raw observations made by the Rover and 0ase receivers in Real Time .#PS has to be written to files for further processing.
Optical S!r8e; C nfi$!rati n'

To create a new configuration= &. $nter the Name for the configuration that will be displayed in the !onfigurations list. (. Select the survey Type that depends on the eOuipment you will use and the results you need to obtain. "A#N$T %ield provides configurations for the following *ptical survey types= d Conventional ' standard survey with a total station and reflectors. d -e!lectorless ' survey in which a reflector is not used. d -obotic ' survey can be performed by one person with a motori?ed instrument. d /evel ' levelling with a digtal level.
In'tr!/ent
To set an instrument for the survey= &. Select the Manu!acturer of total stations or levels. "A#N$T %ield supports Topcon and So55ia, and also #owin for total stations. To simulate a real survey, select "anual "ode. In this mode, no measurements are performed. All the data is entered manually. (. Select the total station or level Model.
NOTICE
NOTICE
The models sho#n in the list correspond to the chosen type of survey.
C nnecti n / de
Initial Connection The connection mode. .epending upon the type of the instrument, it can be the following= Cable2 -adio2 Bluetoot.2 -C Unit2 etc'
O#ti'al )*&$e, Confi.*&ations
Ca&le
Ca!le Comm Settings The parameters of the cable connection= 0aud ;baud rate<, Parity, .ata ;number of the data bits<, and Stop ;number of the stop bits<. %or a .igital 9evel, ma5e sure the *utput "odule is set to RS(-(.
S!r8e; Para/eter'
The Survey Parms dialog contains the parameters that will be used by default during the survey. )easurement )etho& Sets the mode of side'shot measurements. It can be= Sideshot'.irect, Sideshot .irect>Reverse, and Angle>.ist Sets'.ir>Rev. %ngle Se*uence Sets the seOuence of measured angles. )ere %S is foresight point ;the ne t occupation point<, 0S ' bac5sight point ;the previous occupation point<, and Plunge term stands for flipping and rotating the total station telescope by &48 degrees. These are used for the reduction of the angle errors. Possible seOuences are 0S>%S Plunge 0S>%SM 0S>%S Plunge %S>0SM %S>0S Plunge 0S>%SM %S>0S Plunge %S>0SM 0S Plunge 0S>%S Plunge %SM or %S Plunge %S>0S Plunge 0S. "um Sets The number of measurement sets participating in the average. )ere the Num Sets defaults to & and cannot be changed if Sideshot'.irect or Sideshot .irect>Reverse is selected in the "eas "ethod field. A choice of Angle>.ist Sets'.ir>Rev in the "eas "ethod field allows for NumSets to be greater than &. Tolerances The admissible deviation values of the hori?ontal and vertical angles and the distance. %uto %ccept )eas This is for use with the sideshot "eas "ethod FAngle'.ist Sets'dir> RevF and FSideshot'.irect>ReverseF for motori?ed surveys. If this
Confi.*&in. 3obs
option is chec5ed, when the total station turns to the prism it will automatically ta5e a measurement, then turn to the ne t point in the seOuence. If unchec5ed, once the total station turns to the prism, you will be prompted to accept the measurement, then turn to the ne t point in the seOuence. %uto %&+ance Set This is for use with the sideshot "eas "ethod FAngle'.ist Sets'dir> RevF for Robotic and non'R!( surveys. If chec5ed, when each set is complete ;if more than one set is chosen<, the total station will automatically advance to the ne t set and continue the operation. If unchec5ed, when a set is complete, the user will be prompted to advance to the ne t set. ,istance %+eraging It determines if the distance used is measured using one signal or average of several signals. )easure -e+erse ,istances $nables the reverse distance measurements. These are used for the reduction of the distance measurement errors. "e t *pens the second Survey parameters dialog.
S!r8e; Para/eter'
)eas Type Sets the order and the type of the measurements in one set. )ere= )A ' hori?ontal angleM CA ' vertical angleM S. ' slope distanceM ). ' hori?ontal distanceM C. ' vertical distance. E,) mo&e .etermines the sensitivity to use for the distance measurements ' coarse or fine. Prism Constant The parameter of the prism, characteri?ing the difference between the reflection plane and the center of the prism.
Point .ui&e Select this chec5 bo to operate the trac5ing lights. "on/Prism Set whether to use the prism or non'prism mode %utoTopo ;only for the Robotic survey< The parameters of the automatic survey.
Sta9e !t Para/eter'
The Sta5eout Parms dialog enables you to set the parameters that will be used during a sta5eout. 0ori1 ,ist Toler Set the hori?ontal distance tolerance value. -e$erence ,irection The Total Station Sta5eout uses the location of the instrument as the Reference .irection. Turn TS to ,esign Point Turns the Instrument to the .esign Point based on )A only or )A> CA, or in the Automatic )A, or Automatic )A>CA modes
P int Pr pertie'
Point Increment Select if the point number is to be incremented when adding a new point.
Mi'cellane !' ?Optical@ Para/eter'

The "iscellaneous dialog is used to customi?e the user interface= ,isplay Coor&inates a$ter )easurements= when chec5ed, computed coordinates are displayed automatically after a TS measurement is performed and before the point coordinates are stored into the database.
Confi.*&in. 3obs
%pply Earth Cur+ature an& -e$raction= corrects the computed heights for $arth !urvature ;Certical .istance< and slope distances and vertical angles for atmospheric refraction. Prompt $or -o& 0eight= when chec5ed, prompts for a height of the Rod ;Target< before a point is stored. Prompt $or 2S Chec3= when chec5ed, will bring up the 0ac5sight !hec5 dialog when the 0ac5sight Setup dialog is e ited. Prompt $or Co&es= when chec5ed, a dialog will appear to specify the code and attribute before a surveyed point is stored. Sta3eout soun&= gives a sound indicator in Sta5eout as the point is sta5ed out. )anual Sta3eout (p&ate 4-o!otic 5nly6= when chec5ed, the "eas button in the Sta5eout dialogs must be pressed to ma5e a measurement to the Robotic Total Station. Bhen not chec5ed the measurements are recorded continuously. This applies to the Sta5eout dialogs only. N*T$= In conventional or reflectorless modes this option may be chec5ed for the $NT button on controllers to invo5e the "$AS2R$ processM otherwise, the $NT 5ey will "$AS2R$ the first time in sta5eout and then become a SAC$ button. 2eep on storing points= beeps each time the point is stored. 7% 8ero at 9e+el= CA is set to Eero at 9evel. (se 0ori1ontal %ngle 9e$t= )ori?ontal Angles are measured anti' cloc5wise. %utomatically &isplay 2S Setup &ialog: if chec5ed, the 0ac5sight Setup .ialog will be displayed automatically when you attempt to access any of the dialogs involving total station observations. 0ol& 5$$set )easurement= if chec5ed, the dialog to measure an offset point with the help of the selected offset tool displays automatically after each measurement. 0ol& 7ertical 5$$set= available only for the .igital 9evel. If chec5ed, this is used to hold the Certical *ffset between measurements.
34040
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
2S Is %l'ays -e*uire&= if chec5ed, a warning to set 0ac5sight always displays when attempting to access any of the dialogs involving total station and level observations.
SearchATrac9 ?T pc n@
The Search>Trac5 dialog contains the settings for the total station signal trac5ing in the Robotic mode. Turning Spee& Sets the turn speed of a total station, in revolutions per minute. Start Search %$ter Sets the delay between the loss of the signal and the start of searching. Pattern Sets the program for the trac5ing and searching. The Normal ;for AP'9&A and #RT'(888< or #attern 7 ;for the rest of the instruments< mode can be selected to search the prism at the point where the prism is lost. The Instrument searches in up and down directions gradually from the point where the prism is lost. The searching continues until the prism is found. The 0i%. ;for AP'9&A and #RT'(888< or #attern < ;for the rest of the instruments< mode also can be selected to search for the prism. In this case the search pattern tries to locate the prism in a very short time. Instrument searches from up to down. The searching continues until the prism is found or a ma imum of si attempts. The auto trac5ing mode changes to manual mode when the prism cannot be found within si attempts, and returns to the point where the prism was lost. Tr3 Spee& Sets the speed for trac5ing. It can be slow, medium or fast, or, in the case of #TS488a model ' Survey or "achine controlled. Sensiti+ity Sets the power of the accepted signal. It can be low, medium or high. Trac3 9ight
P/N 7010-0492
34141
Confi.*&in. 3obs
Sets if the light on the line of sight should be switched on, off, or the automatic mode is enabled. Scan -ange Sets the width of the trac5ing signal. It can be narrow, middle or wide. Available only in the AP'9&A total stations. -ange Sets the range of searching, in degrees, for the vertical and hori?ontal planes.
SearchATrac9 ?S 99ia@
The Search>Trac5 dialog contains the settings for the total station signal trac5ing in the Robotic mode. Search %rea Sets the area of searching or trac5ing, in degrees, for the vertical and hori?ontal planes.
M nit r Opti n'

9og To Select from options None, %ile, or communication ports. If 9og To %ile or a communication port is chosen, select from the following= 5utput Type Select whether to output -aw Data or Coordinates. 5utput Format %or -aw Data, select whether to output %!'/, %!'1>#TS'3 or #TS'1 format. %or Coordinates, only ##A format is available. File "ame If 9og To %ile is chosen, enter the name and location of the file to log into.
34242
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Coo& inate ),ste+
Comm Settings If a serial !*" port is selected, enter the baud rate, parity, data and stop bits settings for the comm port. Store %s Chec3 Point Bhen selected, the measurements are stored as !hec5 Points to the original points in the monitor listM otherwise, they are stored as normal points.
rdinate S;'te/
To specify the !oordinate System for the ,ob= &. In #ro(ection select the pro@ection to be used from the drop' down list. Initially the list is empty. !lic5 to activate pro@ections necessary for wor5. "ore... (. Select the Use NADC&N chec5 bo , available for all pro@ections on NA.(3 datum, to ma5e the coordinates in "A#N$T %ield eOual to the same from !orpscon ;!oordinate !onversion Software<. -. Select the Use Grid)Ground chec5 bo to enable transformation to ground coordinates for surveying. !lic5 to set transformation parameters. %ind out more on #rid to #round transformation. +. In Datum specify the datum as reOuired for the pro@ection selected. Select the datum from the drop'down list.
NOTICE
NOTICE
The NA?6) datum has three independent reali;ations in MA NET !ield #ith respect to the / S6: datum* NA?6), NA?6)-IT>!@(. and NA?6)ANOAT>ANS. More... !lic5 to add a custom datum if necessary. "ore...
P/N 7010-0492
34343
/. Select Geoid from the drop'down list. The @ob will refer to the selected geoid file to convert ellipsoidal heights to elevations. !lic5 to add the geoid to the list. "ore...
NA2-( 2at!/ 2etail'

The NA.4- datum has three independent reali?ations in "A#N$T %ield with respect to the B#S4+ datum= NA.4-, NA.4-;ITR%71< and NA.4-fN*fTRANS to reflect the updates to these datums. The original intent was for B#S4+ and NA.4- to be identical. The mathematical definition of the ellipsoids ;B#S4+ and #RS48< differs slightly due to the choice of defining constants and number of significant figures. The ma imum discrepancy between a !artesian A,I,E coordinate pro@ected onto both ellipsoids is 8.& mm at +/ degrees latitude. So consider the ellipsoids to be identical. There is some confusion between the B#S4+ and NA.4- datums. Bhen NA.4- was first reali?ed in &741, it used the same control stations as B#S4+, some of which were .oppler stations, which were accurate to about one meter. !onsider the datums to be identical. Since this time, there have been several reali?ations of B#S4+, the latest being B#S4+ ;#&&/8<, which was performed using data from I#S trac5ing stations collected during #PS Bee5 &&/8. Recent studies have shown that B#S4+ ;#&&/8< is essentially identical to the International Terrestrial Reference %rame of (888 ;ITR%88<. Also, during this time there have been no new reali?ations of NA.4-. Bhat this means is that B#S4+ and NA.4- can no longer be considered identical and are in fact different by more than one meter. This is because the B#S4+ datum has been updated over time, using #PS while the NA.4- datum has remained constant since &741. )owever, most software manufacturers still consider B#S4+ to be identical with NA.4-. To be compatible with other manufacturers, Topcon provides transformation parameters from B#S4+ to NA.4- where all the parameters are ?ero. This means B#S4+ eOuals NA.4-. This set of datum transformation parameters is called NA.4- NofTrans.
Topcon also provides another set of datum transformation parameters called NA.4- which reflects the updates to B#S4+. These parameters are ta5en from the National #eodetic Survey. Topcon only uses the first seven parameters, three translations, three rotations, and scale.
Pr <ecti n'
The Pro@ections dialog contains a list of cataloged pro@ections divided by regions, that can be chosen for use in the @ob. To add a desired pro@ection to the list in the !oordinate System dialog= In the #re5De!ined panel= &. !lic5 the region node to e pand the tree of available pro@ections, and use the scroll bar to view the full list of pro@ections. (. )ighlight the name of the desired pro@ection. -. 2se the arrow button to select the chosen pro@ection in the Pre' .efined panel and insert it into the Active panel. +. Repeat the steps to add other pro@ections. /. !reate a custom pro@ection to the list of pre'defined ones by clic5ing the Custom button. "ore... In the Active panel= &. Ciew all active pro@ections.
(. 2se to delete a highlighted pro@ection from the Active panel if reOuired.
-. !lic5 to add the active pro@ections to the drop'down list in the !oordinate System dialog.
GridAGr !nd Para/eter'

To set #rid>#round parameters= &. In #arameters, select which set of parameters to enter= Scale !actor +more''',2 Avera%e ob 0ei%.t +more...,2 or &ri%in #oint +more...,. (. In *rigin Pt and Scale %actor modes directly enter the Combined Scale Factor to be used in the transformation. In any Parameters mode resulting combined scale factor will be displayed at the bottom of the dialog for reference purposes. -. In Avg ,ob )t mode enter the Map Scale Factor from $llipsoid to #rid to be used in the transformation. +. In Scale %actor mode designate combined scale !actor trans!ormation direction. In *rigin Pt and Avg ,ob )t modes this displays used direction. /. $nter the Avera%e ob 0ei%.t to be used in the transformation. 1. $nter the angle value of A?imuth Rotation directly if it is 5nown. 3. !lic5 to calculate the rotation from a?imuths on #rid and #round. "ore... A?imuths>0earings in turn can be calculated from points in the @ob. "ore... 4. In Scale Factor or Avera%e ob 0t modes enter *!!sets o! t.e ori%in alon% t.e Nort. and East a4es. These offsets are from the #eodetic North 'Q #round North. 7. In &ri%in #t mode select from map, list or enter t.e coordinates !or t.e &ri%in #oint. &8. In &ri%in #t mode enter t.e coordinates !or t.e Ground #oint. %ind out more... on how to perform #rid>#round transformation.
C /p!te 1 tati n
To calculate Rotation from a?imuths on #round and #rid= &. Iou can either manually enter the Grid and Ground A1imut.s or clic5 the !ompute button to calculate a?imuth using points
in the @ob that define the needed directions.
(. !lic5
to compute -otation.
C /p!te ABi/!thA6earin$
To compute the a?imuth by two points that define the direction= &. In From, enter the name of the initial point or select the point from the map or the list . (. In To, enter the name of the terminal point or select the point from the map or the list . -. $nter an angle to Add to A1imut. if reOuired. +. Ciew the computed A1imut..
C!'t / Pr <ecti n'

This dialog contains a list of custom ;user'defined< pro@ections. d Initially the #ro(ection list is empty. !lic5 the Add button to create a new custom pro@ection and add it to the list. "ore... d !lic5 the Edit button to change a pro@ection that was added to the list. d !lic5 the Delete button to delete a highlighted pro@ection from the list.
Creatin$ a C!'t / Pr <ecti n

To create a new custom pro@ection= &. $nter a Name for the new pro@ection. (. Select a Type from the list of sample pro@ections. -. Select a Datum from the displayed list of datums, or clic5 to create a custom one ;more...< and then select it. +. $nter the -e%ion to which the pro@ection belongs. If no region is specified, it will be added to the #lobal list.
/. $nter a description ;Note< for the pro@ection. 1. !lic5 Ne4t to enter the new pro@ection specifications depending on the selected sample pro@ection type. "ore...
C!'t / Pr <ecti n Specificati n'

.epending on the Type of pro@ection selected, you are prompted to fill in some of the following fields. &. $nter the latitude ;/at?< and longitude ;/on?< of a point chosen as the origin on the central meridian of the custom pro@ection. (. $nter the false $asting ;East? or E?< and Northing ;Nort.? or N?< of the origin for the pro@ection. These constant values are added to all negative $astings and Northings to get only positive values of $asting and Northing. -. $nter the Scale that sets a constant scale factor along the central meridian of the custom pro@ection. +. $nter the longitude of Central Meridian for the pro@ection. /. $nter the North and South latitudes bounding the area of the custom pro@ection ;Nort./at and Sout./at<. 1. $nter the a?imuth of the a is ;A4isA1imut.< for the pro@ection.
3. !lic5 to create the new pro@ection and add it to the Pro@ection list.
NOTICE
NOTICE
The Batitudes are positive for the Northern Cemisphere, and ne$ative for the Southern Cemisphere. The Bon$itudes are positive for Eastern directions and ne$ative for /estern directions relative to the MT line.
C!'t / 2at!/'
This dialog contains a list of custom ;user'defined< datums.
d Initially the Datum list is empty. !lic5 the Add button to create a new custom datum and add it to the list. "ore... d !lic5 the Edit button to change a datum that was added to the list. d !lic5 the Delete button to delete a highlighted datum from the list.
Creatin$ a C!'t / 2at!/

To create a new custom datum= &. $nter a Name for the new datum. (. Select an Ellipsoid from the displayed list of ellipsoids, or clic5 to create a custom one ;more...< and then select it. -. $nter a description ;Note< for the datum. +. !lic5 Ne4t to enter transformation parameters to convert from B#S4+ to the new datum. "ore...
C!'t / 2at!/ Specificati n'

"A#N$T %ield uses the seven'parameters )elmert Transformation Strict %ormula for datum transformation. To create a custom datum= &. In &!!sets, enter the .atum to Space ;B#S4+< offsets= dA, dI, dE. (. In -otations, enter the .atum to Space ;B#S4+< rotations= rA, rI, rE, in seconds. -. $nter the Scale in ppm.
+. !lic5 list.
to create the new datum and add it to the .atum
C!'t / Ellip' id'

This dialog contains a list of custom ;user'defined< ellipsoids.
d Initially the Ellipsoid list is empty. !lic5 the Add button to create a new custom ellipsoid and add it to the list. "ore... d !lic5 the Edit button to change an ellipsoid that was added to the list. d !lic5 the Delete button to delete a highlighted ellipsoid from the list.
Creatin$ a C!'t / Ellip' id

To create a custom ellipsoid= &. $nter a Name for the ellipsoid. (. !hange the values of ellipsoid semi'ma@or eOuatorial a is ;A< and inverse flattaning ;7)F< as reOuired. -. Note= 0y default, the A and 7)F fields contains the values for the most common reference ellipsoid defined by B#S4+. +. In Note, enter a description for the ellipsoid.
/. !lic5 to create the new ellipsoid and add it to the list of all the available $llipsoids.
Ge id'
#eoid is the physical reference surface of the $arth. Its shape reflects the distribution of mass inside the $arth. #eoid undulations are important for converting #PS'derived ellipsoidal height differences to orthometric height differences ;elevations<. The #eoids 9ist dialog contains a list of #eoids available for selection= the Name and Full #at. d Initially the Geoid /ist is empty. !lic5 the Add button to add a new geoid to the list. "ore...
NOTICE
NOTICE
Install the $eoid file on the dis+ prior to addin$ it to the list. Some $eoid files can &e installed into the eoids folder
30000
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Global )ettin.s
durin$ MA NET !ield installation. They are provided #ith the installation pro$ram as eoid !ile !ormat -.$ff. files. d !lic5 the Edit button to change a geoid that was added to the list. d !lic5 the -emove button to delete a highlighted geoid from the list.
Addin$ a Ge id
In the Add>$dit #eoid dialog, select a #eoid file from dis5 and see the boundaries for the geoid. After being chosen, the geoid file appears in the #eoids 9ist dialog. To add a geoid to the geoids list= &. Select the Geoid Format of the geoid file to load. (. !lic5 0rowse to navigate to the desired file on the dis5, and select it.
d After the geoid is chosen,
displays the path to the file.
d After the geoid is chosen, you can see the boundary of the geoid application= the longitudes and latitudes of the the north'west and south'east corners of the geoid boundary.
-. !lic5 to add the selected geoid to the list of all the available #eoids in the @obs.
Gl &al Settin$'
Sets general settings in "A#N$T %ield to use with the currently selected @ob. In the Global tab=
Confi.*&in. 3obs
&. Select the Use Bold Font chec5 bo to display the te t in bold typeface. (. Select the Enable ob 0istory chec5 bo to enter and save the surveyorJs operation on the @ob in the file. -. Button Sound is the default to provide sound effects when you clic5 any functional button. +. #rompt !or Connection is the default to display the !onnections dialog on opening a @ob. !lear the bo to automatically connect with the device. *n the New obs tab, set parameters to automatically import= &. /ocali1ation !rom previous (ob= d Select Never import to create new @obs without previous locali?ation. d Select Always import to automatically e port locali?ation from the last open @ob to a new @ob upon opening the new @ob. d Select #rompt to import to choose if you want to use locali?ation from the last open @ob. (. #lobal code library to @ob= d Select Never import to create new @obs without automatic import of global codes. d Select Always import to automatically import. d Select #rompt to import to choose whether to import or not.
% & 6ac9!p Settin$'

0ac5up copies are automatically created for the current @ob and safely stored with new names Fa@ob filefnameQRIII'""'..R. m@f.ba5F in the Tar%et !older. Iou are able to open the bac5up of the @ob file in the usual way. "ore... To configure bac5up settings=
Confi.*&in. Men*s
&. !lic5 #ermanent to change the Target folder. Type the new folder name in the bac5up path or select it by clic5ing . (. Select the Fre9uency in which you want the bac5up to occur. Ten minutes is the default. If you select None, bac5ups will not be created. -. In 0istory Dept., change the number of bac5ups to 5eep if reOuired. Three files is the default.
NOTICE
NOTICE
MA NET !ield #ill create a separate D.&a+ file for the current ,o& every time you open the ,o& file durin$ the day #ith another date. If the ,o& file is opened in su&se"uent days, the D.&a+ files previously formed #ill &e over#ritten to the ones #ith the ne#er dates.
+. !lic5 menu.
to save the settings and return to the )ome
C nfi$!rin$ Men!'
This allows you to change the view of the )ome screen and the view and contents of the folders within it. !lic5 the /oc3 Menu button to free?e menus for editing. To edit the )ome screen ;in the left>top panel<= &. )ighlight the name of the desired icon.
(. 2se and buttons to move the name up and down in the list to change the order of icons in the )ome screen.
-. !lic5 to store the changes and open the modified )ome screen. To edit the folder ;in the right>lower panel<= &. )ighlight the name of the desired )ome icon in the left panel. The right panel will show the contents of the corresponding folder. 0y default "A#N$T %ield displays full contents of all the folders. (. If you want to erase a seldom or never used icon in this folder, clear the bo near the desired name. Select the bo again to restore the icon in the folder.
-. 2se and buttons to move the name up and down in the list to change the order of icons in the folder.
+. !lic5 screen.
to store the changes and return to the )ome
C de' Settin$'
To configure global settings for codes= &. In De!ault New Type, set the default type for a new code. If set to #rompt, you will be prompted to define the new code when storing points. (. In Data Entry, set the preferred entry mode between Notes and Codes for Survey dialogs. -. In Code File, use the 0rowse button to select the #lobal !ode file to be used along with the codes in the @ob.
Confi.*&in. )ta6e 7e#o&ts
NOTICE
NOTICE
The default code file -TopS2>E?efCodeBi&.'ml. is installed automatically in the tpsdata folder upon MA NET !ield installation. +. The global setting Code wit. Description toggles the display of descriptions with !odes. /. Selecting Alow Custom allows you to custom define the control codes and enables you to set them #ersistent for Survey dialogs. 1. In the Code #rompts tab, select the appropriate bo es in order to be prompted for setting codes in Survey, !*#*, and Sta5e dialogs.
C nfi$!rin$ Sta9e 1ep rt'

!ontains a list of default configurations of sta5eout reports and their types. To edit the list of report configurations= &. )ighlight a name of the report configuration to control. (. !lic5 the Delete button to remove the report configuration from the list. -. !lic5 the Edit button to change the highlighted report configuration. "ore... +. !lic5 the Add button to create a new configuration. "ore...
1ep rt C nfi$!rati n
Iou can edit= &. The Name of the report configuration. To do this, clic5 in the field. (. The Type of the report configuration. Select a type from the drop down list.
-. Select the corresponding items in the list to include corresponding information in the report. 2se the scroll bar to view the entire list. 0y default all items are included.
+. 2se and arrow buttons to change the order of displayed information in the report. /. !lic5 the Edit button or @ust clic5 the item to open a field to edit
the item Name as reOuired. Iou can use Calculator ma5e some calculations if reOuired.
to
Enterpri'e C nfi$!re
To configure settings for connection to the "agnet $nterprise web' server= &. In /o%in, enter the user name of your account. (. In #assword, enter the secret word of your account. -. Select /o%in on startup to login upon starting the program.
C-a#te& 4
E%'-an.in. 9ata
!lic5 the E change icon on the )ome screen to e change data.
Clic9 an ic n t perf r/ the ta'9:
To ,ob $ ports data from the current @ob to another @ob. To %ile $ ports data fom the current @ob to a file. To -."! $ ports data from the current @ob to a -."! pro@ect. $nterprise 2pload 2ploads @ob data to "A#N$T $nterprise. %rom ,ob Imports data to the current @ob from another @ob. %rom %ile Imports data from a file to the current @ob. %rom -."! Imports data from a -."! pro@ect. $nterprise .ownload .ownloads data from "agnet $nterprise.
P/N 7010-0492
4-1
E%'-an.in. 9ata
Exp rt T
% &
To e port data from the current @ob to another @ob= &. Select an e isting @ob or create a new one to which you will e port data. "ore... (. .efine the general types of data to be e ported. "ore... -. Select what specific data of the defined types will be e ported. "ore... +. %ilter points for e port if reOuired. "ore... /. Ciew the e port progress. "ore...
Select % &
To select a ,ob to open= &. )ighlight the @ob in the @ob list. The @ob list contains the ob Names of all e isting @obs created>opened using this software. (. Bhen a @ob is selected in this list, the Created" and Modi!ied" fields will reflect when the @ob was created and last modified.
-.
indicates the path to the selected @ob. 0y default, the @ob files are stored in the ]program^Z,obs folder. +. If you do not see the desired @ob name in the list, clic5 Browse. It ta5es you to the 0rowse dialog to browse directories to search for the @ob. /. Iou can e port data to a new @ob. !lic5 New to create a new @ob.
Exp rt 2ata T
% &
To select data to be e ported from the current @ob to another @ob= &. %rom the #oints drop'down list, select the filter for points to e port= d All Points d 0y Point 9ist;s<
E%#o&t To 3ob
d 0y Type;s< d 0y Range and !ode;s< d 0y Type;s<, Range and !ode;s< d or None (. Select the corresponding chec5 bo es to select data types, which should be e ported. The data that absent in the current @ob will be unavailable for selection. "ore... -. !lic5 Settin%s if reOuired to setup e port of points as control. 0y default, they are e ported as design. +. !lic5 Ne4t to filter the points if reOuired, then choose the needed ob@ects from a list of ob@ects of the selected data type.
Filter P int' 6; 1an$e and C de?'@

To select for e change points by a range and code;s<= &. Select the Filter by Codes chec5 bo to ma5e the editable field active. $nter the desired codes either manually or clic5 Select and choose the codes from a dialog which appears. Select !odes %or %ilter (. Select the Filter by -an%e chec5 bo , to ma5e the editable field active. Specify the names of the points to be included. These can be specified by a range or by enumeration indivudually. The symbols YMY, Y.Y or Y,Y can be used for Name Separator and Y'Y for -an%e Separator.
NOTICE
NOTICE
If availa&le, clic+ Ne't to continue selectin$ data. The Ne't &utton is availa&le until all data of chosen types is selected. After the Ne't &utton &ecomes $reyed out, the &utton appears to start the e'port process.
Select O&<ect' t
Exp rt
The title of this dialog changes based on the data type selected for e port. &. Bhen filtering points by types, the e isting types of points will be available for selection. (. The ob@ects in this dialog are those available in the current @ob. -. !hoose the needed ob@ects from a list of ob@ects= d Selection can be done by placing chec5 mar5s in the list ne t to the desired codes. d !lic5 C.ec3 and Unc.ec3 to toggle the highlighted item;s< on and off, respectively. d !lic5 Select All to choose all the items at a time.
NOTICE
NOTICE
If the Ne't &utton is availa&le, clic+ it to continue selectin$ data. The Ne't &utton is availa&le until all data of chosen types is selected. After the Ne't &utton &ecomes $reyed out, the &utton appears to start the e'port process.
Select C de' F r Filter

All the codes e isting in the current @ob will be listed in the !ode;s< list. Select the code;s< for which you want to e change all the points having that code= d Selection can be done by placing chec5 mar5s in the list, against the desired codes. d !lic5 C.ec3 and Unc.ec3 to toggle the highlighted item;s< on and off, respectively. d !lic5 Select All to choose all the items at a time.
(+#o&t F&o+ 3ob
Exp rt Stat!'
The e port process is reflected in the $ port Status dialog that contains a progress bar and comments about the e port process. The progress bar displays the percentage of the points being e ' ported.
Exp rt 5arnin$' display
the warning messages during the $ ' port process if necessary.
I/p rt Fr / % &
To import data from another @ob to the current @ob= &. (. -. +. Select the @ob from which you will import data. "ore... .efine the general types of data to be imported. "ore... %ilter points for import if reOuired. "ore... Select what specific data of the defined types will be imported. "ore... /. Ciew the import progress. "ore...
I/p rt 2ata Fr / % &

The title of this dialog conains the name of the @ob selected. The dialog enables you to select the data to import and, if necessary, filter the imported points= &. %rom the #oints drop'down list, select the filter for points to import= d All Points d 0y Point 9ist;s< d 0y Type;s< d 0y Range and !ode;s< d 0y Type;s<, Range and !ode;s< d or None
E%'-an.in. 9ata
(.
Select the corresponding chec5 bo es to select data types which should be imported. The data that absent in the current @ob will be unavailable for selection. "ore... -. !lic5 Settin%s if reOuired to setup import of points as control. 0y default, they are imported as design. +. !lic5 Ne4t to filter the points if reOuired, then choose the needed ob@ects from a list of ob@ects of the selected data type.
Select O&<ect' t
I/p rt
The title of this dialog changes based on the data type selected for import. &. Bhen filtering points by types, the e isting types of points will be available for selection. (. The ob@ects in this dialog are those available in the current @ob. -. !hoose needed ob@ects from a list of ob@ects= d Selection can be done by placing chec5 mar5s in the list ne t to the desired codes. d !lic5 C.ec3 and Unc.ec3 to toggle the highlighted item;s< on and off, respectively. d !lic5 Select All to choose all the items at a time.
NOTICE
NOTICE
If the Ne't &utton is availa&le, clic+ it to continue selectin$ data. The Ne't &utton is availa&le until all data of chosen types is selected. After the Ne't &utton &ecomes $reyed out, the &utton appears to start the import process.
Filter P int' 6; 1an$e and C de?'@

To select for e change points by a range and code;s<= &. Select the Filter by Codes chec5 bo to ma5e the editable field active. $nter the desired codes either manually or clic5 !hec5
E%#o&t To File
and choose the codes from a dialog which appears. Select !odes %or %ilter (. Select the Filter by -an%e chec5 bo , to ma5e the editable field active. Specify the names of the points to be included. These can be specified by a range or by enumeration indivudually. The symbols YMY, Y.Y or Y,Y can be used for Name Separator and Y'Y for -an%e Separator.
NOTICE
NOTICE
If the Ne't &utton is availa&le, clic+ it to continue selectin$ data. The Ne't &utton is availa&le until all data of chosen types is selected. After the Ne't &utton &ecomes $reyed out, the &utton appears to start the import process.
I/p rt Stat!'
The import process is reflected in the Import Status dialog that contains a progress bar and comments about the import process. The progress bar displays the percentage of the points being imported.
I/p rt 5arnin$' display
the warning messages during the Im' port process if necessary.
Exp rt T
File
To e port data from the current @ob to a file= &. Select the data type and the file format to which you will e port data as reOuired. "ore... (. Set the code style if needed. "ore... -. If reOuired, select file units for data to be e ported. "ore... +. If reOuired, select the points types to e port. "ore... /. %ilter points for e port if reOuired. "ore... 1. Set a name and destination directory for the file.
3. Set the coordinate system and coordinate type for e ported points. 4. .efine settings for custom te t formats. "ore... 7. Ciew the e port progress. "ore...
Exp rt 2ata T
File
The To File dialog is used to e port different data types to files with either predefined or custom formats. ,ata Select the data type to e port to the file= Points, 9ines, Point 9ists, !ode 9ibrary, Raw .ata, )ori?ontal Alignments, Certical Alignments, A'Section Sets, Roads, A'Section Templates, 9ocali?ation, Scanning .ata, Roads Survey, ,ob )istory, Surfaces ;TINs<, 9ayers or "ultiple Types. Format Select the corresponding type of the file for e port of the data type you selected. Select $ile units !hec5 this field to set units for values in the file. "ore... Select types o$ the points !hec5 this field if not all types of points should be e ported ;only for Points data type<. (se $ilters !hec5 this field if filters ;by code and by range< should be used for e ported points ;only for Points data type<. %SCII $ile properties .efine the conditions of the e ported file interpretation. These conditions are the use of the same type for the attributes and the use of Ouotes for the te t values. The AS!II %Ile Properties field appears only when points are being e ported to a file of te t type. Setup .A%>.B# Settings %or $ port
C de St;le Set!p
This dialog allows you to setup a code style for the !ustom Te t, T.S RAB and "! pro@ect ;tp-< formats. 9ist o$ co&e styles Iou can add>delete any code style. All saved code styles are available in the list. Initially four predefined styles are available= Topcon, !arlson, #eoPA6 and $agle Point. %+aila!le $iel&s $or co&e style Iou can combine any available fields to the one code style. 2sing arrows, move the necessary items from the Available column to the right part the *rder column in the desired order. !ode Style Separators !ontrol !odes
C de St;le Separat r'

This dialog lists the current separators for the selected code style. Co&e Separator $nter the separator to delimit the multiple codes. String Separator $nter the separator to delimit the code string. Control Co&e Separator $nter the separator to delimit the control code. "ote Separator $nter the separator to delimit the note.
C ntr l C de'
This dialog lists the control codes which can be replaced by user' defined values during an e port routine. The changes are applied only for the selected style. The current "A#N$T %ield control code value ;if it e ists< is placed in the brac5ets after the name of the corresponding control code.
%rc Start 4%S6: Calue of the Arc Start control code. %rc En& 4%E6: Calue of the Arc $nd control code. -ectangle 4-6: Calue of the Recangle control code. Close 4C6: Calue of the !lose control code. 9ine Start: Calue of the 9ine Start control code. 9ine En&: Calue of the 9ine $nd.
File 0nit'
This dialog allows you to select units for the data being e changed. This option is available for all data types and formats containing distance>angular values. .epending on the data and format selected, you can set only distance, or distance and angle units if available.
Select 2ata F r Exp rt T
File
This dialog lists the available data to e port depending on the selected format. Possi!le &ata types Points, 9ines, !odes, Surfaces, Alignments, A'sections ;templates<, TS Raw .ata and #PS Raw .ata. Selection !hec5 the control after the appropriate data type to e port. The control ne t to this selection lists the number of the corresponding elements in the @ob.
Select Filter' F r P int'

This dialog is used to select the points filters for the file e port. Points Select the filter for the points to e port from the drop'down menu= All Points, 0y Type, 0y Range and !ode, 0y Type, Range and !ode, None.
41010
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Settin$' F r Text C!'t / F r/at'

The Te t %ile %ormat dialog allows you to select the format for the Te t %ile. ,elimiter Select the separator symbol between the data in the import file. It can be a space, a comma, tab or other ;select from the list<. Select File Format Selects the order of the fields in the imported file. %&& Format Allows you to create a new file format with the help of the !ustom Style dialog. E&it Format Allows you to change an e isting file format with the help of the !ustom Style dialog. Select %ields %or !ustom %ormats
Select Field' F r C!'t / F r/at'

2sing arrows, move the necessary items from the left part of the dialog ;the Available column< to the right part ;the *rder column< in the desired order. Sa+e Saves the %ile Style and returns to the Te t %ile %ormat dialog. A new string appears in the Select %ile format drop'down menu.
4atit!deA4 n$it!de 1ec rd F r/at

%rom the %ormat ;9at>9on< drop'down menu in the 9at>9on Record %ormat dialog, select the desired format to represent data being imported from>e ported to the file.
Set!p 2CFA25G Settin$' F r Exp rt

Iou can select the styles of the point>lines for output. Point Style
P/N 7010-0492
41111
!hoose one from the available styles= d AutoCAD #oints= only point coordinates. d AutoCAD #oints wit. Te4t Fields= point coordinates with te t fields for point name, elevation, codes and attributes. d Civil @D)/and Des3top #oint &b(ects= !ivil -. points will be used. d Carlson #oint Bloc3s= !arslon point bloc5s will be used. d TopSU-* #oint Bloc3s= the default TopS2RC style will be used. It includes point name, elevation, codes, strings and attributes. 9ine Style d AutoCAD /ines= only line coordinates. d AutoCAD /ines wit. Te4t Fields= line coordinates with te t fields for line name, elevations, codes and attributes. d TopSU-* /ine Bloc3s= the default TopS2RC style will be used. It includes line name, elevations, codes, strings and attributes. (se ;, coor&inates !hec5 this button to e port elevations with plain coordinates as well. (se te t $ont height 0y default, it is auto. !hec5 mar5 this bo to open a field to manually> automatically set the height of te t fonts to show the te t ;in !A. units<.
I/p rt Fr / File
To import data from a file to the current @ob= &. Select the data type and the file format from which you will import data as reOuired. "ore... (. Select settings for importing points. "ore... -. If reOuired, select file units for imported data. "ore... +. Select the file from which data will be imported. /. .efine settings for custom te t formats. "ore... 41212
(+#o&t F&o+ File
1. Set up the coordinate system and coordinate type for imported data. 3. Ciew the import status. "ore...
I/p rt 2ata Fr / File

The From File dialog is used to import different data types from files with either predefined or custom formats. ,ata Select the data type to import from the file= Points, 9ines, Point 9ists, !ode 9ibrary, )ori?ontal Alignments, Certical Alignments, A' Section Sets, Roads, A'Section Templates, 9ocali?ation, Scanning .ata, Surfaces ;TINs<, 9ayers or "ultiple Types. Format Select the corresponding type of the file being imported for the data type you selected. Select $ile units This option is available for all data types and formats containing distance>angular values. Bhen this chec5bo is selected, the Ne t button opens the %ile 2nits screen that allows you to select units for imported data. .epending on the data and format selected, you can set only distance, or distance and angle units if available. Settings Set the type of the imported points. "ore... Settings %or Te t !ustom %ormats Import of "ultiple .ata Types
Set!p Settin$' F r I/p rt

Set the type of the imported points= Import Points %s ;only for Points, Point 9ists and "ultiple data types< Select the type of the points you import=
P/N 7010-0492
41313
E%'-an.in. 9ata
d Control #oints= the points with coordinates, 5nown from the catalog. These are used for locali?ation. d Desi%n #oints= points used as targets for sta5ing. There are several options to customi?e import from .A%>.B# file. Import !loc3 !ase points Select this chec5 bo to import bloc5 base coordinates as points. 9oa& as !ac3groun& image Select this chec5 bo to import data from the file as a bac5groud image. If the bo is unchec5ed, all data from the file will be stored as a set of the points>lines within a @ob. This will not happen if import of point lists has been selected.
I/p rt f M!ltiple 2ata T;pe'

After loading data from the file you can select the data types you want to import.
4i't
f I/p rted O&<ect'
This dialog shows the list with the ob@ects loaded from the file. !hec5 the control before the appropriate ob@ect to import.
Exp rt T
(2MC
The To )C Pro#ect dialog starts the procedure of e port of different data types from a -."! pro@ect to the current "A#N$T @ob. ,ata The multiple type of data is available for e port. Format Sets the U. tp- type of the "! pro@ect file. Select $ile units Bhen this chec5 bo is selected, the Ne t button opens the %ile 2nits screen that allows you to select units for the data e ported. .epending 41414
(+#o&t F&o+ 39MC
on the data and format selected, you can set only distance, or distance and angle units if available. E port areas as lines Select this chec5 bo to e port area data from the current @ob or line data to the "! pro@ect. Co&e Style *pens the !ode Style dialog to set a format for point properties ;codes, control codes, strings and notes< to e port to the file. %lphanumeric points 'ill !e renum!ere& starting at: .isplays a number at which "A#N$T %ield will start renaming points with alphanumeric names as the T.S format demands points that have only numerical names. "A#N$T %ield will continue numbering from the last previous number of the @ob point.
I/p rt Fr / (2MC
The From )C Pro#ect dialog starts the procedure of import of different data types from a -."! pro@ect to the current "A#N$T @ob. ,ata The multiple type of data is available for import. Format Shows only the U. tp- type of the "! pro@ect file. Select $ile units Bhen this chec5 bo is selected, the %ile 2nits screen displays to allow you to select units for the data imported. .epending on the data and format selected, you can set only distance, or distance and angle units if available. Settings Sets the type of the imported points= d Control #oints= the points with coordinates, 5nown from the catalog. These are used for locali?ation.
P/N 7010-0492
41010
E%'-an.in. 9ata
d Desi%n #oints= points used as targets for sta5eout.
Enterpri'e 0pl ad
To upload data from the current @ob to an enterprise pro@ect= &. Select a #ro(ect from a list of available pro@ects. After you select the pro@ect, the names and types of the inbo es appear in the field. !hec5 mar5 the desired inbo . (. !lic5 Add to upload a file. The name and path to the file will be displayed in the corresponding field. -. If reOuired, clic5 Clear All to erase selections. +. !lic5 Upload to start uploading data to the selected inbo . Upload status will show the upload progress and the result.
Enterpri'e 2 =nl ad
To download uploaded data from an enterprise pro@ect to your device= &. Select a #ro(ect from a list of available pro@ects. After you select the pro@ect, the names and types of available inbo es appear. (. Select the inbo that contains the needed files. The names of the uploaded files and the dates of uploading appear. Select the file;s< to be downloaded. -. If reOuired, clic5 -e!res. to renew the content of the selected inbo . +. !lic5 Download to start downloading data to your device. Download status will show the download progress and the result.
2!plicate
&<ect'
The dialog is being shown when an ob@ect with the same name as the imported one already e ists in the @ob. .epending on the ob@ect type, the following options are available= 41111
9*#li'ate ob:e'ts
5+er'rite< The ob@ect in the database will be overwritten with the imported one. -ename< The imported ob@ect will be renamed. Pre$i < The entered prefi will be added to the imported ob@ect name. Su$$i < The entered suffi will be added to the imported ob@ect name.
P/N 7010-0492
41717
E%'-an.in. 9ata
Notes2
41515
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
C-a#te& 0
C-attin.
!lic5 the icon for te t messaging. The C.at dialog contains two tabs= The Contacts tab displays a list of the names of all "A#N$T $nterprise users who are currently assigned to a chat. &. To ma5e the list show only the users with online presence status, chec5 the &nly &nline bo . Iou will see the users who are ready for immediate connection. (. To ma5e the list show last receipients of your messages, select the Recent !ontacts chec5 bo that appears if there have been any contacts. -. To start chatting= d Select the user you want to chat with by chec5ing the bo near the name. d !lic5 the Start C.at button to initiate conversation. d Type in the massage you want to post to the selected user. The %cti+e Chats tab displays a list of the users with whom you have already started chatting.
P/N 7010-0492
0-1
C-attin.
Notes2
0-2
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
C-a#te& 1
E itin. 3ob 9ata

!lic5 the icon to open the $dit folder.
Points $dits properties of e isting points and add new points manually. !odes $dits code properties and add new codes. 9ayers $dits layer properties and add new layers manually. 9inewor5 $dits the linewor5 properties and create new linewor5s manually. Areas $dits areas. Point 9ists $dits point lists. Raw .ata $dits raw data and recompute coordinates.
P/N 7010-0492
1-1
E itin. 3ob 9ata
Images .eletes>adds bac5ground images. Sessions $dits observation sessions for #NSS receivers. Sta5e Reports $dits sta5e reports. Roads *pens a subfolder with si options to edit the road properties and design new roads.
Edit P int'
The Points dialog contains the list of the stored points with their coordinates and codes. Fin& !y Point Select an option from the drop'down list to find a point= 0y Range, 0y !ode, 0y !ode String, 0y Radius, 0y Name or 0y 9ayer. Fin& "e t %inds the ne t point in the list that satisfies the same conditions as the previous %ind. ,elete .eletes the point from the list. E&it *pens a dialog to edit the selected pointYs parameters li5e name, code, coordinates, etc. %&& .isplays a dialog to create a new point. Settings 1-2
E it Points
*pens the .isplay !onfiguration dialog.
P int Inf
This page contains information about the point to be added>edited. Iou can edit this information= &. Name of the point. (. !ode and attribute information for the point. d Iou can select a code from the drop'down list. !ode needs to be defined at the time it is entered if it is not a code that e ists in the !odes dialog d If the code type is 9ine or Area, an icon will display that the point belongs to a line. Set a string and, if reOuired, a control code. "ore... d Press the !ode button to view information on the code. Iou can set two control codes, and attribute values for the code. "ore... -. The display of coordinates depends on the selected coordinate system. +. If reOuired, select the Control #oint chec5 bo to use the point as a control point for locali?ation.
4ine= r9 Pac9a$e
Additional manipulations of linewor5 can be performed using control codes for the points with the same code'string combination. 2p to two control codes can be specified for every code associated with a point to store the points which will be connected to form open or closed polylines. Select the codes of the 9ine type to use for such points. The supported control codes of AS, A$, !, and R control line behavior= &. The AS and A$ control codes indicate the start and the end of an arcM respectively. Arc parameters are determined by the presence of additional points in the line. These points can create
P/N 7010-0492
1-3
E itin. 3ob 9ata
the line segment with the arc start>or end point which will act as the tangent to the arc.
NOTICE
NOTICE
If only one point is &et#een the arc start and end points, the arc is formed such that all the three points lie on the arc. If there are t#o, or more than t#o points, &et#een the points #ith the AS and AE control codes, the points are all connected &y strai$ht line se$ments. (. The R control code is applied to the third point of a three point polyline, and results in the automatic creation of a fourth point of a parallelogram whose diagonal is specified by the first and the third point. -. Bhen the ! control code is applied to a point, it connects it to the starting point of the line, thus closing the line.
NOTICE
NOTICE
MA NET !ield #ill not use this line#or+ pac+a$e if the Allo# Custom Control Code &o' on the lo&al screen is chec+ed. In this case, the user can enter any strin$ to mar+ it as a control code. MA NET !ield #ill not interpret these control codes.
C de " Attri&!te'
The !ode Attributes tab allows you to select a code and its associated string, attributes and control code. Co&e Shows the selected code. A code can be selected from the drop' down list. Ctrl Co&e The control code list shows all the control codes used. The !ontrol !ode is a special type of code that can be used by some graphic tools for the interpretation of the survey results.
1-4
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
NOTICE
NOTICE
A second control code can &e added to the code &y turnin$ on the option for a second control code in the top left menu item. String $nter a string for the code.
NOTICE
NOTICE
A strin$ can &e added to the code &y turnin$ on the option for strin$s in the top left menu item. %ttri!utes 9ist The list shows the available attributes for the code and allows you to enter>select its value. %ttri! -ange *pens the Attribute Ranges dialog, which displays the valid ranges $or the attri!utes $or the selecte& co&e. )ultiple Co&es To add multiple codes, clic5 on this button. "ore...
M!lti"C de
.isplays a list of all codes, strings and attributes for the point being edited. %&& Add a code to the list. "ore... E&it $dit the selected code in the list. "ore... ,elete .elete a code from the list.
P int Chec9
If a point e ists and you try to save another point with the same name, a dialog displays a prompt that the point already e ists. &. .isplays the offsets of the point you are trying to save from the point that is saved. (. This dialog enables you to= d &verwrite on the e isting point d -ename the point to store as another point d or Store as c.ec3 point to the e isting point -. If you select to store the point as a chec5 point, you can enable using it in weighted averaging positions. To do this, chec5 Use in wei%.ted avera%e. "ore... +. In RT6 surveys, if chec5ed, the Correct base option allows you to setup the 0ase at un5nown position. In this case, you can correct the base position if an observed Topo point has 5nown coordinates stored in the @ob and has the same name as the base. The 5nown coordinates of the observed point are not replaced with the observed coordinates and are used to correct the 0ase coordinates. After either closing the Topo dialog or moving to another tab, recomputations are performed, and the coordinates of all points are updated using the new 0ase coordinates. Note= %or Correct Base to wor5 properly, the coordinate type selected in .isplay must be the same as for the 5nown coordinates of the observed Topo point.
4a;erASt;le
9ayer Select the 9ayer in which to have the Point. !lic5 the F...F to $dit 9ayers. Point Style Select the point type and color to be used with the point.
5A
9ist control displays list of stations that can be used in the Beighted Average for the point. Also displayed are the $, N, 2 residuals, BA !ontrol ;whether its used or not<, and notes. (se in =%>E clu&e $rom =% Select a point in the 9ist control. Bhen you clic5 on this button, the appropriate action will be ta5en ' the point is added for the BA or e cluded from the BA.
Ph t
N te
This displays a photo note attached to the point. To edit the photo note= /. 2se the ?? and @@ buttons to scroll through the photos attached to the point. 1. !lic5 Add to attach an image to the note. Note= If the controller supports the camera, there will be two options available. !lic5 either Browse to select a photo from e isting ones or Capture to capture an image using the controller. 3. !lic5 Edit to delete the currently seleted photo and attach a different one instead. Note= If the controller supports the camera, there will be two options available. !lic5 either Browse to select a photo from e isting ones or Capture to capture an image using the controller. 4. !lic5 Delete to remove the photo note currently displayed for the point. The pop'up menu in the top left corner of the screen contains three additional options for a photo note. "ore...
Ph t
N te P p !p /en!
d If reOuired, clic5 S.ow Coordinates to display the coordinate system and the coordinates of this point over the photos. Note= If you select S.ow Coordinates and the B#S4+ location of
the point is available, the coordinates will be displayed in ..""SSSS formatM otherwise, no coordinates will be displayed or saved in the image. d If reOuired, clic5 S.ow Direction to display compass readings ta5en at the time you ta5e the photo note. This option is enabled for the device that supports the camera and the compass. Note= The direction is displayed over the photos provided the compass has been calibrated. d Bhen you first open the Photo Note tab and select the S.ow Direction option, the !ompass !alibration dialog will prompt you to calibrate the compass before ta5ing a photo ;if not already calibrated<. The !ompass !alibration dialog appears automatically only once. If you s5ip the calibration, you will not be prompted again as long as you edit the point. Iou will be able to calibrate the compass any time by clic5ing the Calibrate Compass option enabled in the pop up menu.
NOTICE
NOTICE
/hen you first open the ,o&, the Sho# Coordinates and Sho# ?irection options are unchec+ed. After you select one or &oth options for one photo, the application #ill +eep the selections. The selections #ill &e lost #hen the device is shut do#n. Also, you can turn on or off Sho# Coordinates and Sho# ?irection from the Settin$s dialo$ in the Ima$e Capture dialo$.
C /pa'' Cali&rati n
The !ompass !alibration dialog allows you to process the compass calibration. The application provides a graphic image describing calibration movement. d If you do not want to process the calibration, clic5 the S3ip button to ignore the compass calibration, and no direction will be provided even if the S.ow Direction is selected. Note= If you s5ip the calibration, you will not be prompted again as long as you edit the point. Iou can calibrate the compass any
time by clic5ing the Calibrate Compass option enabled in the pop up menu. d !lic5 the Start button to start calibration. The calibration time depends on the device used. %or e ample, it is &8 seconds for the %!'(-1, and 18 seconds for the #RS'& device.
I/a$e Capt!re
The Image !apture dialog allows you to ta5e a photo note for the point. Iou can turn on or turn off S.ow Coordinates and S.ow Direction from the Settings dialog that displays by clic5ing the Settings button in the top right corner of the dialog. "ore...
PT4
This page is displayed when the point is a PT9 point or when the PT9 mode is slected when adding a point. From Point, To Point .efines the 9ine for the PT9 offsets. These points can be selected from the @ob by clic5ing on 9ist. PT9 5$$sets 9ine defines the distance along the line from the %rom Point. 5$$set defines the distance in a direction perpendicular to the line. 0eight is the height differnce between the %rom Point and the current poin
P int Chec9
If a point e ists and we try to save another point with the same name, this dialog appears. 5$$sets .isplays the offsets of the point we are trying to save from the point that is saved. As5s the user if they would li5e to= *verwrite on the e isting point
Rename the point to store as another point or whether to save it as a !hec5 Point to the e isting point.
Find &; P int

The %ind by Point dialog contains a form for searching a point by its name. "ame The name or part of the name of a point. )atch entire name Set if the whole name was entered in the Point Name field. )atch partial name Set if a part of the searched name was entered in the Point Name field. Search Starts the search process and returns to the Points dialog, highlighting the point if it is found.
Find &; C de
The %ind by !ode dialog contains a form for searching a point by its code. Co&e Select the code from the list which is to be searched. Search Starts the search process and returns to the Points dialog, highlighting the point if it is found.
Chec9 P int'
This page is present if the point has any chec5 points associated with it. The list displays the Name of the chec5 point, the d$, dN, and d) vector of the chec5 point from the recorded point, the !oordinates of the chec5 point and any Notes associated with the chec5 point.
11010
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Co e - Att&ib*tes
C!t Sheet
This page is present if this point has been sta5ed out and the sta5eout point stored. The list displays the Name of the chec5 point, the d$, dN, and d) vector of the sta5ed out point from the recorded point, the !oordinates of the sta5ed out point and any Notes associated with the sta5ed out point.
C de " Attri&!te'
!ontains a list of codes used for the survey, the list of attributes for each code, and a set of tools for editing. Co&es 9ist of codes in the ,ob. %ttri!utes 9ists the attributes of the selected code. %&& *pens the blan5 !ode or the Attribute dialog ;depending upon the list below which the button is located<. A new attribute can be added only if at least one code e ists and it is highlighted. E&it *pens the !ode or the Attribute dialog ;depending upon the list below which the button is located< with the properties of the highlighted entry. ,elete .eletes the highlighted entry.
C de
To create a new code or edit an e isting code, enter the code details= &. The Name of the code. (. The Description for the code.
P/N 7010-0492
11111
E itin. 3ob 9ata
-. The Type of the ob@ects that the code describes= #oint, /ine or Area. $ach type has an associated plotting style;s< that can be edited. d #oint= Set a symbol and attributes for points and color. d /ine" Set a symbol for nodes, style and thic5ness for lines, and color. d Area" Set a symbol for nodes, style and thic5ness for the boundary, filling style and transparency for the area, and color. d Attribute" Select the radio buttons on this tab to enter the code at the beginning of a line>area ;Start< or at every node point along the line>area ;Eac. Node< d DTM" Select the corresponding chec5 bo on this tab to use the code in DTM, as a Brea3eline or>and an E4clusion Area +. .etermine a /ayer for the code if reOuired.
Attri&!te'
&. The Name of the attribute. (. The Type of the attribute. Te4t, Bool2 Date5Time2 8nte%er2 Menu or -eal Number. $ach type has an associated settings that can be edited. d Te4t" Select this if the attribute value is an alpha'numeric string. Set the ma imum number of characters you can enter. d Bool" Select a boolean value. d Date5Time" 2se the default ;current date< and time for the code attribute or set the date and time from the drop'down list. d 8nte%er" Select this if the attribute value is an integer. Set the minimum and the ma imum values of the attribute. d Menu" Select this to assign a list of values to select for the attribute. The values are entered in the field and added to the list with the Add button.
11212
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
;ine4o&6
d -eal Number" Select this if the attribute value is a real number. Set the minimum and ma imum values of the attribute. -. The De!ault value for the code attribute. Select the -e9uired chec5 bo to be prompted to enter the attribute value every time when using the corresponding code. If the bo is not selected, the default value will be always used for the code attribute automatically.
M!ltiple C de Strin$'
If it is necessary to add several strings to an ob@ect, one can use the "ultiple !odes tool. The dialog contains a table of !odes and Attributes. To add a code string to the table, insert the name of the code in the !ode field or choose it from the code list and set the attributes. Then type the string in the FDF field and press the Add button. The new entry appears in the table.
C ntr l C de
The !ontrol !ode is a special type of code that can be used by the graphic tool for the interpretation of the survey results. It can be any string. Control Co&e The control code list. It shows all the used control codes and also allows one to enter a new control code.
4ine= r9
The 9inewor5 dialog contains a list of e isting 9inewor5s on the left part of the dialog, and the two windows on the right part, that present the general view of the selected linewor5 in the hori?ontal and vertical planes. To view the current selected linewor5 in a larger map, double' clic5 one of the map plots. .o notice that the double clic5 on map and property buttons are disabled if accessing this dialog from the Alignment Pair dialog.
P/N 7010-0492
11313
E itin. 3ob 9ata
E&it *pens the $dit 9ine dialog. Press to edit the properties of the selected 9ine. ,elete Press to delete the selected 9ine from the list. %&& Add a 9inewor5 with this button.
Edit Area
!ontains a list of e isting areas on the left side of the screen, and the two windows on the right side that represent the view of the selected area in the hori?ontal and vertical planes. ,elete Remove the highlighted Area from the list. E&it $dit the Area selected in the list. %&& !reate a new area.
P int' in Area
.isplays a list of e isting points in the selected Area and the general view of the area boundary. %rea The name of the Area. 9ist o$ Points The list of currently selected points. The up and down arrows to the left of 9ist of Points allow you to move the highlighted point up or down in the order of the points in the area. The arrows symbol switches on>off the 5eyboard arrow 5eys.
11414
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Point ;ists
%rea +ie' Area is bound with a closed line. 9ine nodes ;points< have the same code of area type to form an area boundary. The point highlighted in the list of points will be mar5ed with a yellow circle. The A symbol deletes the highlighted point from the area. The symbol to the bottom right of the map can be used to toggle between the point list and the plot with the point list. Point In$o Shows the point information of the currently selected single point. Select Points .isplays five methods of adding points to the beginning of the line= By Code Select the codes with which the points are added to the area. By Code Strin% Select the codes and strings with which the points are added to the line. From Map Select the points by clic5ing them on the mapM points that are seOuentially clic5ed are connected with a line to arrange an area. From /ist Select the points from the list of points. From /ine Select all points from the line.
P int 4i't'
The 9ist of Point 9ists dialog contains a list of e isting Point 9ists on the left part of the dialog, and the two windows on the right part, that present the general view of the selected list in the hori?ontal and vertical planes. To view the current selected point list in a larger map, double'clic5 one of the map plots.
P/N 7010-0492
11010
E itin. 3ob 9ata
%&& *pens the Add Point 9ist dialog. Press to create a new 9ist. E&it *pens the $dit Point 9ist dialog. Press to edit the properties of the selected 9ist. Copy Press to create a copy of the selected 9ist. ,elete Press to delete the selected Points 9ist from the list.
P int 4i't
The Point 9ist tab shows the general properties of the Point 9ist. Point 9ist "ame The name of the Point 9ist. 9ist o$ Points The list of currently selected points. Adding the point to the list can be performed in two ways. d T.rou%. t.e map" tap the plot on the right. The large "ap dialog opens. Select the points by tapping them on the map ' the two conseOuently tapped points will be connected with line. Press !lose to return to the Add>$dit Point 9ist dialog. d T.rou%. t.e Select #oints button" pressing the button displays the floating menu of five items= 0y Range, 0y !ode, 0y Radius, 0y !odeString, %rom "ap, and %rom 9ist. Select the desired way of adding points and fill in the suggested form= set the range, chec5 the codes, set the center point and the radius of the area, select the points from the map or using the list. Point In$o Shows the point information of a current selected single point. The 2p and down arrows to the left of 9ist of points allows the user to move the highlighted point up or down in the order of the points.
11111
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Point ;ists
The arrows symbol switches on>off the 5eyboard arrow 5eys that duplicate the arrows on the dialog. The A symbol deletes the highlighted point from the list. The symbol to the bottom right of the map can be used to toggle between the point list and the plot with the point list.
Select P int' 6; 1an$e

-ange o$ Points $nter here the range of points the user would li5e included in the selected Points 9ist
NOTICE
NOTICE
The sym&ols F=F, F.F or F,F can &e used for Name Separators and F<F for a >an$e Separator.
Select P int' &; C de

Select Points 'ith Co&es Select the codes for which we want to add all the points having that code.
Select P int' &; 1adi!'

Point Select the point either by entering it manually or by selecting it from the map or list. This will be the center of the circle. -a&ius $nter the Radius;distance< for which, around the selected Point the user wants Points added to the 9ist.
Select P int' &; C de Strin$'

Co&e Select the code by selecting it from the combobo . String
P/N 7010-0492
11717
Select the strings you would li5e to use for the codestring combination.
P int 4i't Chec9

If a Points 9ist e ists with the same name it prompts the user to select if he wants to overwrite e isting one or rename the Points 9ist.
4a;er'
9ayer 9ist 9ist of 9ayers with Names and Status ;whether it is empty or has ob@ects, and if it is the default layer<. The icon to the left of the name indicates whether it is visible or not. (p>,o'n %rro's "ove the selected 9ayer up or down in the ordering. %&& Add a new 9ayer. Ins Insert a new 9ayer after the currently selected one in the 9ist. E&it $dit the selected 9ayer. ,el .elete the selected 9ayer. .efault layer cannot be deleted. The layer to be deleted should not have any ob@ects.
4a;er
9ayer "ame Name of the 9ayer. 7isi!le !hec5 to ma5e this layer Cisible.
;a,e&s
"ote $nter a note here for the 9ayer.
St;le
9ine Style Select the Style for the lines to be displayed in this layer and also the width. Point Type Select the icon for the points to be displayed in this layer. 9ayer Color Select the color for the lines and points in this layer.
C l r Palette
Color Select the !olor for the ob@ects to be displayed on the map.
O&<ect'
.isplay a list of Point, 9ines and Alignments belonging to the Raw .ata The Raw .ata listed includes information on the= d Name= Point name and the icon displaying the type of the point, d Type= The type of measurement, d Codes= !odes for the point, also the Strings associated with the codes if String display is selected, d 08)Ant 0t= %or the *ptical mode ' the height of the instrumentM %or the #PS: mode ' the antenna height, d Coordinates= !oordinates of the point, d Ctrl Code= !ontrol codes associated with the point, d Notes,
E itin. 3ob 9ata
d /ocal Time= It is the controller time when the point was stored. %or points collected in the #PS mode, its the time of the epoch whose coordinates are stored or the time of the last accepted epoch when averaging. First>9ast "oves the cursor to the first or last point. E&it *pens the $dit Raw .ata dialog which allows one to edit user entered raw data. -ecompute Recomputes the point coordinates after editing the pointYs raw data. Fin& !y Point %inds a point by its name or a part of its name. Fin& !y Co&e %inds a point by its code. Fin& "e t %inds ne t point that satisfies the same conditions as the previous found point. The button in the upper'left corner of the dialog enables the following menu= d ob 8n!o= displays the ,ob Info dialog. d S.ow -aw G#S$)TS= If the #PS: mode is active, the #PS: raw data is displayed by default. If you want to display the TS raw data in the list, select this menu. Similarly, if you are using the *ptical mode, the TS raw data is displayed and optionally the #PS: raw data. d An%le Sets -eport= This menu item will only be displayed when we are in TS mode and the @ob contains angle sets which have been acOuired. !lic5 the option to get the Angle Sets Report. "ore...
12020
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
;a,e&s
Set!p Selecti n
An angle set is a group of total station observations at the occupation point which are ta5en at the same time and constitute a measurement to a point. This group can have a number of different foresight and bac5sight seOuences. The Setup Selection dialog displays a list of all of the occupations in the @ob which have angle sets associated with them. The &ccupation column displays the points where the occupations was set up. The ASets column displays the number of angle sets ta5en at the occupation. The 08 column will displays the instrument height of the occupation. To generate an angle sets report= d Select the chec5bo es associated with the occupations for which you want to get the report. d To select all the occupations in the list, clic5 Select All. d To erase all selections of occupations, clic5 Clear All' d !lic5 the -eport button to generate the Angle Sets Report.
An$le Set' 1ep rt

The Angle Sets Report allows you= d To review detailed report information on the individual angle sets of only the occupations selected in the Setup Selection dialog. d To save the generated report to a file. To do this, clic5 the icon
. The file will be saved in the Report folder.
Edit 1a= 2ata

The $dit Raw .ata dialog displays the properties of the selected record and allows the user to change the name, code, notes, and record specific parameters. .isplays either the "ar5 or P! ;Phase !enter< !oords of the base station. The point, code and antenna information is available for
P/N 7010-0492
12121
E itin. 3ob 9ata
display and editing only if we have the "ar5 !oordinates available for the base. The "ar5 coordinates can be edited only if the point was manually entered or if its a design point. The P! coordinates cannot be edited.
4i't
f Sta9e 1ep rt'
.isplays a list of e isting reports in the @ob. The red asteris5 icon near the report name means that the report is set as current for this type. 7ie' Show the full report selected. ,elete Remove the highlighted report from the list. The user will have twice to confirm deletion before the report data is deleted. E&it $dit the report selected in the list. %&& !reate a new report.
Edit Sta9e 1ep rt

Name $nter the name of the report selected. Report Type Select the report type from the list. !onfiguration $dit the report configuration for the report type selected in the list. Set !urrent If chec5ed, set a new report current.
12222
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
<a'6.&o*n
(+a.es
Die= Sta9e 1ep rt

.isplays design references and appropriate information for this report type.
6ac9$r !nd I/a$e'

The Image 9ist dialog displays a list of available images for the bac5ground. Add *pens the Add Image dialog to browse the directories on the controller to add a file to the list. .elete .eletes the currently selected file from the list. *6 *pens the selected file. If the file does not e ist or there is an error, a warning message is displayed, and the Image 9ist dialog will appear again so you can select another file. !ancel $ its out of the dialog without changes. *nly one #eoTiff file can be selected at a time. "ore file types will be added later. To use a file once it is added, ma5e sure the file is chec5ed in the list. If no file is selected, then no bac5ground image will appear in the map.
Pr pertie'
This dialog displays the Properties of the selected file. %ile Name The imageYs file name without e tension. %ile Path The imageYs location on the device or P!. %ile Type
P/N 7010-0492
12323
E itin. 3ob 9ata
Specifies the file type of the image. 2nits Allows you to select the units in which the image file is scaled. 2se Borld %ile The 2se Borld %ile chec5 bo tells the user whether or not the image needs a Borld %ile to be plotted properly.
1 ad' F lder
!lic5 the icon to open the $dit Roads folder.
Roads $dits properties of e isting roads and create new roads. )ori?ontal $dits an available hori?ontal alignment and create a new one. Certical $dits an available vertical alignment and create a new one. Templates $dits properties of an e isting 'section template and create a new one. A'Sections $dits available 'sections and create a new one. String Set $dits an e isting set of strings and create a new set.
12424
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
7oa s
1 ad'
The Roads dialog displays a list of the created roads, and plots of the hori?ontal and vertical alignments of the selected Road. %&& Select the Add Road dialog to create a new Road. E&it *pens the $dit Road dialog, displaying the parameters of the selected road. ,elete .eletes the selected road from the @ob.
AddAEdit 1 ad'
In this dialog you can edit the properties of a Road Alignment. The dialog consists of two separate tabs with Alignment properties. The properties are the following= %lignment ta! "ame The name of the Road Alignment. 9ayer A combo bo where you can select the layer in which this road should be placed. The associated button brings up the layer properties dialog. 01 %lnt In this combo bo youYll find all available )ori?ontal Alignments. Select one for your Road. The associated button brings up the )ori?ontal Alignment list where you can add, edit and delete )ori?ontal Alignments. 7t %lnt In this combo bo youYll find all available Certical Alignments. Select one for your Road. The associated button brings up the Certical
P/N 7010-0492
12020
E itin. 3ob 9ata
Alignment list where you can add, edit and delete Certical Alignments. Start Station>Stn>Chainage )ere you can enter the Start Station of the Road. Start Station is the start position along the Road Alignment. Station>Stn Inter+al This is the interval at which the ne t station position will be decided. Negative values can be entered, which will cause the advancement to be a decreasing instead of an increasing along the line. Sur$ace ta! A/Sect Set > String Set This button can toggle between A'Sect Set and String Set. Toggling between the two will change the contents of the combo bo and the button. If you wish to associate your Road with a !ross Section or a String Set, please select one here. =or3ing Corri&or: 9e$t $nter the left side wor5ing corridor here. The left side must be lower or eOual to the right corridor. =or3ing Corri&or: -ight $nter the right side wor5ing corridor here.
Start P int
The Start Pt tab displays the parameters of the road starting point. Point The point name can be entered manually ;if a new point name is entered, the point will be created with the coordinates entered in the North, $ast and )eight fields< or chosen from the map or from the list. Co&e The point code and attributes can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list for a new point.
12121
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
7oa s
"orth, East, 0eight The local coordinates of the point. Start Sta>Start Chain The starting station or the starting chain distance. Sta Inter+al The interval between the points where the road related computations are made.
Dertical Ali$n/ent
The Cert tab shows the list of vertical alignment elements, or long sections ;for the 9ong Section vertical alignment type<, the vertical alignment plot, and the starting station ;or chainage< at each element. In the case of the $lement vertical alignment type, the element list has the following columns= Element" the icon and the name of the element= vertical grade or parabola. /en%t." the length of the elementM Start Grade2 End Grade" the grades of the element, in percentage, at the starting and ending points. %or a Certical grade element this values are the same. In the case of the 9ong Sections vertical alignment type, the element list has the following columns= /on% Section" the name of the element. Station" the station distance. Elevation" the elevation value on the station. *C /en%t." the vertical curve length is the length of the interval near the station, where the alignment has a parabolic shape. %&& .isplays a floating menu from which to select an element or the 9ong Section dialog for adding a vertical element after the last element. Insert .isplays a floating menu from which to select elements or the 9ong Section dialog for insertion at the selected location in the list.
P/N 7010-0492
12727
E itin. 3ob 9ata
AddAEdit 1 ad
The first Road dialog is used to set the name of the road and select the CA9 ;vertical alignment< type of the created road. "ame $nter a name for the Road 7%9 Type There are two ways of the creating vertical elements for the roads. d /on% Section" select 9ong Section to create the road by sections. The vertical alignment is presented as a set of sections between the stations where the heights are 5nown ;usually these are the e tremums of the vertical alignment line<, and the interval around the station where the vertical alignment line has a parabolic shape. d Elements" select $lements to create the virtical curve using either Certical #rades or Parabolas.
4 n$ Secti n
The 9ong Section dialog contains parameters of the section. Station The station distance from the beginning of the road. 0eight>Ele+ation The height at the station. Cur+e Type Select if the curve is either a Parabola or !ircular Arc. 7C length Available when the !urve Type is Parabola. The length of the vertical curve at the station. ;It is assumed that the station is located in the middle of the interval.< %rc -a&ius Available when the !urve Type is !ircular Arc. $nter the radius of the Arc. 12525
7oa s
H riB ntal Ali$n/ent

The )? tab shows the list of hori?ontal alignment elements, the hori?ontal alignment plot and the starting station ;or chainage< of each element. The element list has the following columns= d Element" the icon and the name of the element= line, spiral, curve, or intersection pointM d /en%t." the length of the elementM d A1imut." the a?imuth at the beginning of the elementM d -adius" the radius of the curve, spiral or intersection point ;the radius of the spiral is the radius at the end of the YincomingY spiral or at the beginning of the Ye itingY spiralM the radius of the intersection point is the radius of the corresponding curve.< d A7" Spiral constant &= 9ength of Tangent'Spiral to Spiral'!urve. The spiral constant is the sOuare root of the product of the length and the radius of the spiral. d A<" Spiral constant (= 9ength of !urve'Spiral to Spiral'Tangent. The spiral constant is the sOuare root of the product of the length and the radius of the spiral. %&& .isplays a floating menu from which to select elements for adding after the last element. Insert .isplays a floating menu from which to select elements for insertion at the selected location in the list. E&it *pens a dialog with properties of the selected element. ,elete .eletes the element from the road.
P/N 7010-0492
12929
E itin. 3ob 9ata
4ine
To add a line, press the Insert or Add buttons in the )? tab of the Add Road dialog and select the 9ine item from the floating menu. The 9ine dialog will open. The plot at the bottom'left corner will show the elementYs appearance. 9ength The length of the line element. %1imuth 0y default, the a?imuth is set tangent to the previous element. This field is editable only for the starting element of the road. To change the a?imuth of all other elements, the chec5 mar5 from the Tangent to Previous Item menu on the bitmap in the upper'left corner of the dialog should be removed.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Caution should &e e'ercised #hen settin$ the a;imuth, since road elements are usually tan$ential to each other.
C!r8e
To add a curve, press the Insert or Add buttons in the )? tab of the Add Road dialog and select the !urve item from the floating menu. The !urve dialog will open. The plot in the bottom'left corner will show the elementYs appearance. -a&ius> ,eg Chor&> ,eg Cur+e The radius of the curve, or one of the two parameters unambiguously defining the radius= degree of chord, or degree of curve. 9ength>Chor&>Tangent>)i& 5r&>,elta>E ternal The length of the curve element, or one of four parameters unambiguously defining the curve length= chord, tangent, middle ordinate ;the distance from the midpoint of a chord to the midpoint of the corresponding curve<, delta ;the angle between the radii corresponding to the curve< or e ternal ;a section of a line connecting center of the arc with verte of the angle<. 13030
%1imuth 0y default, the a?imuth is set tangent to the previous element. This field is editable only for the starting element of the road. To change the a?imuth of all other elements, the chec5 mar5 from the Tangent to Previous Item menu on the bitmap in the upper'left corner of the dialog should be removed. Turn The direction of turn. The Right value stands for cloc5wise direction, the 9eft value for countercloc5wise direction.
Spiral
To add a spiral, press the Insert or Add buttons in the )? tab of the Add Road dialog and select the Spiral item from the floating menu. The Spiral dialog will open. -a&ius> ,eg Chor&> ,eg Cur+e The radius of the curve, or one of two parameters unambiguously defining the radius= degree of chord, or degree of curve 9ength> Sp Const $nter either the 9ength or Sp !onst ;Spiral !onstant< for the Spiral. The Spiral !onstant is the sOuare root of the product of the length and the radius of the spiral. %1imuth 0y default, the a?imuth is set tangent to the previous element. This field is editable only for the starting element of the road. To change the a?imuth of all other elements, the chec5 mar5 from the Tangent to Previous Item menu on the bitmap in the upper'left corner of the dialog should be removed. Turn The direction of turn. The Right value stands for cloc5wise direction, the 9eft value for countercloc5wise direction. ,ir
The direction of movement along the spiral, TS;traverse'spiral< to S!;spiral'circle< ;entering the turn<, or !S;circle'spiral< to ST;spiral' traverse< ;e iting the turn<.
Inter'ecti n P int
To add an intersection point, press the Insert or Add buttons in the )? tab of the Add Road dialog and select the Intersection Point item from the floating menu. Point The name of the intersection point or select it from the map or the list. $ither enter the name manually or the North and $ast coordinates. "orth, East The plane coordinates of the intersection pointM cannot be changed for an e isting point. -a&ius> ,eg Chor&> ,eg Cur+e The radius of the curve, or one of two parameters unambiguously defining the radius= degree of chord, or degree of curve 9ength1> Sp Const1, 9ength2> Sp Const2 $nter either the 9ength or Sp !onst ;Spiral !onstant< for the Spiral. The Spiral !onstant is the sOuare root of the product of the length and the radius of the spiral.
Dertical Ali$n/ent
The Cert tab shows the list of vertical alignment elements, or long sections ;for the 9ong Section vertical alignment type<, the vertical alignment plot, and the starting station ;or chainage< at each element. In the case of the $lement vertical alignment type, the element list has the following columns= d Element" the icon and the name of the element= vertical grade or parabola. d /en%t." the length of the elementM
d Start Grade2 End Grade" the grades of the element, in percentage, at the starting and ending points. %or a Certical grade element this values are the same. In the case of the 9ong Sections vertical alignment type, the element list has the following columns= d /on% Section" the name of the element. d Station" the station distance. d Elevation" the elevation value on the station. d *C /en%t." the vertical curve length is the length of the interval near the station, where the alignment has a parabolic shape. %&& .isplays a floating menu from which to select an element or the 9ong Section dialog for adding a vertical element after the last element. Insert .isplays a floating menu from which to select elements or the 9ong Section dialog for insertion at the selected location in the list.
Dertical Grade
To add a vertical grade, press the Insert or Add buttons in the Cert tab of the Add Road dialog and select the Certical #rade item from the floating menu. 9ength The length of the vertical grade element. .ra&e The grade of the element, in percents. If the grade is falling, the value should be set negative.
C!r8e
To add a curve, press the Insert or Add buttons in the Cert tab of the Add Road dialog and select the !urve item from the floating menu. Cur+e Type Select if the curve is either a Parabola or !ircular Arc.
9ength Available when the curve type is Parabola. The length of the parabola element. %rc -a&ius Available when the curve type is !ircular Arc. The radius of the element. Start .ra&e, En& .ra&e The starting and ending grades of the element, in percents. If the grade is falling, the value should be set negative.
C"Secti n
The A'Section tab contains a list of stations, where cross section templates are applied. It also displays a general view of the cross section. The list of templates contains the following columns= d Station" The station where the template is applied. d /e!t B Section2 -i%.t B Section" The names of the templates for the left and right parts of the road relative to the center line. The left and right cross sections can be different.
NOTICE
NOTICE
If t#o or more templates are defined, the intermediate cross sections are calculated usin$ interpolation. %&& *pens a blan5 A'Section dialog. E&it *pens the A'Section dialog with properties of the selected cross section. ,elete .eletes the station from the list.
C"Secti n
The A'section dialog contains the parameters of the cross section. Station The station distance. 9e$t A/Section, -ight A/Section The cross section templates for the left and right parts of the road. These can be chosen only from the e isting cross section templates.
Calc!late 1 ad P int'
The !alculate Road Points dialog allows the user to generate points along, to the right and to the left of the center line of the road, along its entire length. Points to .enerate .efines the points to generate ' center line points, the points to the right of the center line, and>or the points to the left of the center line. Also, if it is desired to include the transition points, place the chec5 mar5 in the corresponding field and select a prefi >suffi for them, if necessary, in the appearing field below. Station Inter+al Sets the interval between the generated points. 0y default it is the Station Interval set in the Start Pt tab in the Roads dialog. "e t *pens the !9 Points Params dialog.
Centerline P int Para/'

The !9 Points Params dialog displays the parameters of points to be computed along the center line. First Point The name of the first point. Co&e
The code and attributes of the points being generatedM entered manually or chosen $rom the &rop/&o'n list. Pre$i >Su$$i Bhen chosen, sets the prefi or suffi to be added to the generated point name. Sa+e points to Point 9ist !hec5 if it is necessary to save the generated points to a separate points list. Bhen chec5ed, a field appears where the name for the list can be set.
1i$htA4eft Off'et P int' Para/'

.isplays the parameters of points to be computed to the right or left of the center line. First Point The name of the first point. Co&e The code and attributes of the points being generatedM entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. Pre$i >Su$$i Bhen chosen, sets the prefi or suffi to be added to the generated point name. Sa+e points to Point 9ist !hec5 if it is necessary to save the generated points to a separate points list. Bhen chec5ed, a field appears where the name for the list can be set. 5$$sets Set the offset of the point from the center line along two dimensions= hori?ontal ;the Right field< and vertical ;the 2p>.own field< relative to the surface ;Surface *ffset type< or to the hori?ontal line ;%lat *ffset type<.
"o&i=ontal ali.n+ents
H riB ntal ali$n/ent'

The hori?ontal alignments dialog contains three basic parts= The alignment list A list with all available hori?ontal alignments. The alignment pre+ie' A preview window displaying the currently selected hori?ontal alignment The e&it !uttons ,elete Select the alignment or alignment that you wish to delete, and then press this button. IouYll be as5ed for confirmation. E&it $dit a currently selected alignment. %&& Add an entirely new alignment.
Dertical ali$n/ent'
The vertical alignments dialog contains three basic parts= The alignment list A list with all available vertical alignments. The alignment pre+ie' A preview window displaying the currently selected vertical alignment The e&it !uttons ,elete Select the alignment or alignment that you wish to delete, and then press this button. IouYll be as5ed for confirmation. E&it
E itin. 3ob 9ata
$dit a currently selected alignment. %&& Add an entirely new alignment.
Hi$hA4 = P 'iti n'

This dialog will display any e tremums found along a vertical alignment. The types of e tremums found are the high or low positions of arcs, curves and the transition points between two straight lines. The dialog consists of three parts= d Alnt Name" The name of the vertical alignment. d /ist" A list with high>low positions data. d T.e MAGNET Field menu" FSave to %ileF. The )igh>9ow Positions list contain the following data= Station 4(nit6 The station along the vertical alignment. Type F)ighF or F9owF position. Ell ht>Ele+ation 4(nit6 $llipsodial height or $levation, depending on the coordinate system used. -a&ius 4(nit6 Radius of an arc with an high>low e tremum.
Save to File will save the current listing to a file with a standard file name= F0i%./ow#ositions't4tF. The file name is selectable by the user.
>-)e'tion Te+#lates
C"Secti n Te/plate'
The A'Sect Templates dialog displays a list of the e isting templates in the upper part of the dialog and a plot of the highlighted template in the lower part. The list contains three columns= d Name ;the name of the template<, d !ut Slope and d %ill Slope values. %&& *pens the blan5 A'Sect Templates dialog. E&it *pens the properties of the selected template. ,elete .eletes the template from the list.
C"Sect Te/plate
The A'Sect Template dialog contains parameters for the template. "ame The name of the template. Slope The !ut and %ill parameter values ;Run values for cut and fill for a unit rise<. These values represent the hori?ontal increment of the slope for a unit vertical increment. The !ut slope is used when the road surface is below the terrain, and the %ill Slope is used when the road surface is above the terrain. Also the dialog contains a list of segments comprising the template and a plot of the template. A list of segments consists of three columns= !ode ;the code of the segment<, )? ;the hori?ontal offset<, Cert ;the vertical offset<. %&&
E itin. 3ob 9ata
*pens the blan5 Segment dialog. The added segment will be attached after the last segment in the list. Insert *pens the blan5 Segment dialog. The added segment is inserted in the list above the currently highlighted segment. E&it *pens the Segment dialog with the parameters of the highlighted segment. ,elete .eletes the segment from the template.
Se$/ent
The Segment dialog contains the parameters of the segment. Segment Point The name of the segment point. 5$$set The hori?ontal and vertical offsets. Press the .own>2p>#rade button to select the type and value of the vertical offset. 0eing input as #rade ;in T<, the vertical offset will be recalculated to meters ;or other selected units< after the *6 button is pressed.
C"Secti n Set
This dialog contains a list with all available cross section sets. There dialog consists of five separate parts= 9ist $ach available cross section set is listed here by their name. The cross sections are sorted by their add date. Pre+ie' The selected cross section will be previewed on the dialog. ,elete
14040
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
)t&in. )et
The delete button is used for deleting one or more cross sections. If the cross section being deleted contains references to cross section templates ' these will also be removed if the user wishes to do so. E&it Select one cross section for editing. %&& Add a new cross section.
Strin$ Set
The String Set dialog lists the currently available String Sets. It consists of a list, a preview window and three buttons= String Set list The list containing all available String Sets. Pre+ie' 'in&o' .isplays the currently selected String Set. ,elete %or deleting one or more String Sets. "ultiple String Sets can be deleted at the same time. E&it %or editing a single String Set. %&& %or adding a single String Set.
AddAEdit Strin$ Set

This dialog is displayed when adding a new String Set or editing an e isting one. The dialog is separated into four destinct parts= String Set
P/N 7010-0492
14141
E itin. 3ob 9ata
The name of the current String Set. If youYre editing a current String Set is is possble to change the name of the String Set by changing the name in the input bo . String Sets list This list contains all the Strings that the String Set consists of. It is possible to change the order of the Strings by using the arrow buttons located on the left side of the Strings list. Pre+ie' 'in&o' This window will display the currently selected String. It can be hidden with the arrow button in the right bottom corner. E&it !uttons There are three buttons available for manipulating the Strings within the String Set. The first one is Delete, which will delete all the selected Strings. The second one is Edit which will edit the currently selected String ;double clic5 on the String will also edit it<. The third one is Add for adding a new String to the current String Set.
AddAEdit 1 ad Strin$ Ali$n/ent Pair

Add or $dit a Road String Alignment Pair. This dialog is separated into three parts= 01 %lnt an& 7t %lnt Select the hori?ontal and vertical alignment you want the Alignment Pair to consist of. Select From /ine !reate an alignment pair from a 9ine. From Map Select a 9ine from a "ap and create the Alignment Pair from it. )%."ET Fiel& menu 01 Alnt
14242
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
)t&in. )et
.isplays the hori?ontal alignment dialog where you can add, edit or delete hori?ontal alignments. *t Alnt .isplays the vertical alignment dialog where you can add, edit or delete vertical alignments.
P/N 7010-0492
14343
E itin. 3ob 9ata
Notes2
14444
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
C-a#te& 7
Cal'*late
Calc!late F lder
Clic9 an ic n t calc!late the ta'9:
Inverse The four inverse tas5s available in the Inverse menu are based on computing the a?imuth and distance between two points, given their coordinates. Point in .irection !alculates the coordinates of a point, using a 5nown point, and angle and distance offsets from the 5nown point. Intersection !omputes the intersection point or points given two 5nown points, and either the direction or distance from the 5nown point. !alculator .oes calculations and conversion. Iou type in the entire eOuation you want to calculate, press eOuals, and the result is shown. !urves !omputes a full set of parameters to determine a curve using four various minimum sets of specified parameters.
P/N 7010-0492
7-1
Cal'*late
Area !alculates the area of a polygon formed by any points, or the coordinates of a point>points which form a polygon of the desired area, after being added to the point list>linewor5>area. !orner Angle !alculates the angle between two lines, a start line and an end line, which have a common mid point. *ffsets !alculates the coordinates of points along a line, a curve, or a road. Ad@ust Transforms points and includes five tas5s= Rotate, Translate, Scale, (. Transform and Traverse Ad@ustment. Traverse !alculates traverse and sideshot points, based on hori?ontal, and vertical offsets along a direction which is defined by an a?imuth, or right, left or deflection angles. .T" !alculates data between two .T"DP-7Ms, for a new .T", and along contour lines.
Calc!late In8er'e
Point To Point !omputes the inverse ;a?imuth and distance< between two 5nown points.
Cal'*late Fol e&
Point to 9ine !omputes the station of a 5nown point inverse to a 5nown line. Point to 9ist !omputes the inverse ;a?imuth and distance< for all the points in a Points list with respect to a 5nown point. Point to !urve !alculates the station of the 5nown point inverse to the 5nown curve.
T=
P int In8er'e
The Two'Point Inverse tas5 computes the inverse ;a?imuth and distance< between two 5nown points. The In+erse Page contains the data needed for the tas5= %rom Select the starting point. To Select the ending point. These points can be entered manually, selected from the map or from the list of ,ob Points. !alc !alculates the inverse. The -esults Page shows the results of the calculation= %1imuth to the second point from the first point. 0,ist is the hori?ontal distance from one point to another. 7,ist is the vertical distance from one point to another. The F'F sign means that the height of the second point is lower than the height of the first point. &"orth is the increment of the North coordinate. &East is the increment of the $ast coordinate. &0eight is the increment of the height.
Cal'*late
.ra&e4Slope6 ' the increment of the height in percent. Slope &istance ' the computed distance between the two points.
In8er'e P int t
4ine
The Inverse Point to 9ine !*#* tas5 computes the station of a 5nown point inverse to a 5nown line. The In+erse Point to 9ine page contains the data needed to calculate the offsets of the point with respect to the line= Point Select the 5nown point name. It can be entered manually, selected from the map or from the list of ,ob Points. !ode .isplays the code of the 5nown point and cannot be changed here. Start Point Select the starting point of the reference line. A?imuth>A? to Pt Set the a?imuth of the reference line manually. %or A? to Pt, select another point, and the a?imuth from the 5nown point to this point will indicate the direction. Start Stn Set the starting station of the reference line. Store PT9 Point If %1 to Pt is selected, chec5 if the 5nown point is to be stored as a PT9 point. !alc Press to calculate the inverse. The -esults Page shows the results of the calculation= From Point is the name of the 5nown point. Start Point is the name of the starting point of the line. %1imuth is the a?imuth of the 5nown line. Start Station is the starting station of the line.
Cal'*late Fol e&
Station indicates the distance between the starting point and the pro@ection of the 5nown point on the reference line. 5$$set is the hori?ontal offset between the 5nown point and the Station point. 0eight is the vertical offset between the 5nown point and the Station point.
In8er'e P int t
C!r8e
The Inverse Point to !urve !*#* tas5 computes the station of a 5nown point inverse to a 5nown curve. Point Select the 5nown point name. It can be entered manually, selected from the map ,or from the list of ,ob Points. !urve The In+erse Point to Cur+e page contains the data needed to calculate the offsets of the point with respect to the curve= The dialog changes its appearance depending upon the first curve point chosen. Iou can manually enter, select from the list or from the map the following two sets of points= PC Point, Cur+e Point, PT Point, or -P Point, PC Point, PT Point. In the second case, the distance between -P Point and PC point should be eOual to distance between -P Point and PT point. The radius and the P! and PT points define two curves ' one with delta less than or eOual &48 degrees ;Small curve< and the other with delta greater than or eOual &48 degrees ;9arge curve<. Calues of Small or 9arge can be selected from the Cur+e drop'down bo to indicate which of these two curves should be used for computations. Start Stn Set the starting station of the reference curve. !alc Press to calculate the curve parameters.
Cal'*late
The -esults page shows the initial data and the results of the calculation= Tangent %1imuth is the a?imuth of the tangent at the point of intersection of the curve and the line @oining the point of intersection to the radius point. Sta indicates the distance between the starting station and the point of intersection of the curve and the line @oining the point of intersection to the radius point. 5$$set is the hori?ontal offset between the 5nown point and the Station point. &0eight is the vertical offset between the 5nown point and the Station point.
In8er'e P int t
P int 4i't
The Inverse point to point list !*#* tas5 computes the inverse ;a?imuth and distance< for all the points in a Points list with respect to a 5nown point. The In+erse Pt to Pt 9ist Page contains the data needed for the tas5, the list of points in the selected point list and a window for the plot of the point list= Point Select the 5nown point. This can be entered manually, selected from the map or the list of ,ob Points. Point 9ist Select the point list. The name can be entered manually, selected from the list of @ob Point 9ists. 9ist of Points .isplays the list of points in the selected point list along with their codes. !alc Press to calculate the inverse. The -esults Page shows the following results of the calculation for every point in the point list=
Cal'*late Fol e&
%1imuth to the point in the point list from the 5nown point. 0,ist is the hori?ontal distance from one point to another. 7,ist is the vertical distance from one point to another. The F'F sign means that the height of the point in the list is lower than the height of the 5nown point. &"orth is the increment of the North coordinate. &East is the increment of the $ast coordinate. &0eight is the increment of the height. .ra&e4Slope6 ' the increment of the height in percent. Slope &istance ' the computed distance between the two 5nown points and the point in the list.
P int in 2irecti n
The Point in .irection !*#* tas5 calculates the coordinates of a point, using a 5nown point, the a?imuth, the angle offset from the a?imuth line and the distance offsets from the 5nown Point. %rom Point Set the starting point. It can be entered manually, selected from the list of ,ob Points or from the map. A?imuth>A? to Pt Set the a?imuth either by value or as a direction to another 5nown point. Angle *ffset Set the angle offset from the a?imuth line. ). #rd>#nd Set the grid or ground distance offset along the angle offset line. To alternate between grid or ground press the button. Cert .ist Set the height offset. !ogo Pt Set the name of the computed point. !ode
Cal'*late
Set the code of the computed point. !alc Press to calculate the coordinates of the un5nown point. The -esults Page shows the following results of the calculation. The coordinates are displayed for both the computed points= "orth is the northing coordinate of the point. East is the easting coordinate of the point. Ell 0t is the height of the point. %1imuth from the 5nown point to the un5nown point. 01 ,istance is the hori?ontal distance between the two points. 7ert ,istance is the vertical distance between the two points. Save Saves the results of the calculation. *nly the points with chec5 mar5s ne t to them will be saved.
Calc!late C!r8e'
!urve !alculates the full set of curve parameters, given one length and one radius parameter. -Pt !urve !omputes the curve parameters given three points= starting point of the curve ;P! point<, any curve point and ending point of the curve ;PT point<, the Radius point, and P! and PT points. PI D Tangents !omputes the starting, ending and center points of a curve, given the point of intersection, the radius, and the a?imuths from the PI point to the P! and PT points respectively.
Cal'*late Fol e&
Radius D Pts !omputes the parameters and the coordinates of the center of a curve given the starting and ending points of the curve and a radius parameter.
C!r8e S l!ti n
The !urve Solution !*#* tas5 calculates the full set of curve parameters given, one length and one radius parameter. The Cur+e Solution page contains the data needed for the tas5 and a window for the plot of the curve= Radius>.eg !hord>.eg !urve Select the curvature parameter. 9ength>!hord>Tangent>"id *rd Select the length parameter of the curve. Turn Select the direction of turn relative to the starting point. !alc Press to calculate the parameters of the curve. The -esults Page shows the results of the calculation= -a&ius of the curve. 9ength of the curve. Chor& is the distance between the starting and ending points ;tangent points< of the curve. ,egree Cur+e defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of a curve with a length of &88 units. ,egree Chor& defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of curve whose chord is &88 units long. ,elta is the internal angle from center to tangent points. Tangent is the distance between the point of intersection of the tangents at the starting and ending points, and the ending point. E ternal is the shortest distance beween the point of intersection and the curve ;along the line @oining the point of intersection to the radius point<.
Cal'*late
)i& 5r& is the length of the line segment between the curve and the chord on the line @oining the point of intersection to the radius point. Segment is the area of a circle bounded by a chord and the minor arc that it cuts off. Sector is the area of a circle bounded by two radii and the minor arc they determine. Fillet is the area between the arc of a circle and the two tangents at the end points of the arc.
PI E Tan$ent'
The PI and Tangents !*#* tas5 computes the starting ;P!< and ending ;PT< points, and the center ;Radius Point< of a !urve, given the Point of Intersection ;PI<, the radius, and the a?imuths from the PI point to the P!, and PT points, respectively. The PI B Tangents page contains the data needed for the tas5= PI Point Set the Point of Intersection. It can be manually entered, chosen from the map or from the list of ,ob Points. A? PI to P! Set the a?imuth from the PI point to the starting curve point. A? PI to PT Set the a?imuth from the PI point to the ending curve point. Radius>.eg !urve>.eg !hord>Tangent Set the appropriate radius parameter of the curve. P! Point Set the name and the code for the calculated starting curve point. PT Point Set the name and the code for the caculated ending curve point. RP Point Set the name and the code for the calculated radius point.
71010
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Cal'*late Fol e&
!alc Press to calculate the parameters of the curve and the coordinates of the P!, PT and RP points. The -esults Page shows the results of the calculation= "orth is the northing coordinate of the P!>PT>RP point. East is the easting coordinate of the P!>PT>RP point. Ell 0t is the height of the P!>PT>RP point. -a&ius of the curve. 9ength of the curve. Chor& is the distance between the starting and ending points ;tangent points< of the curve. ,egree Cur+e defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of a curve with a length of &88 units. ,egree Chor& defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of the curve whose chord is &88 units long. ,elta is the internal angle from center to tangent points. Tangent is the distance between the point of intersection of the tangents at the starting and ending points, and the ending point. E ternal is the shortest distance beween the point of intersection and the curve ;along the line @oining the point of intersection to the radius point<. )i& 5r& is the length of the line segment between the curve and the chord on the line @oining the point of intersection to the radius point. Segment is the area of a circle bounded by a chord and the minor arc that it cuts off. Sector is the area of a circle bounded by two radii and the minor arc they determine. Fillet is the area between the arc of a circle and the two tangents at the end points of the arc. Save Saves the results of the calculation. *nly the points with chec5 mar5s ne t to them will be saved.
Three Pt C!r8e
The Three Pt !urve !*#* tas5 computes the curve parameters given three points= starting point of the curve ;P! point<, any curve point
P/N 7010-0492
71111
Cal'*late
and ending point of the curve ;PT point<, or the Radius point and, P! and PT points. The Three Points Cur+e page displays the initial data for the tas5 The dialog changes its appearance depending upon the first point chosen. Iou can manually enter, select from the list or from the map the following sets of points= PC Point, Cur+e Point, PT Point, or -P Point, PC Point, PT Point. In the first case the coordinates for the -P Point will be calculated along with the curve parameters. The name and the code for this calculated point can be set. In the second case the distance between -P Point and PC point should be eOual to distance between -P Point and PT point. The radius, and the P! and PT points define two curves ' one with delta less than or eOual to &48 degrees ;Small curve< and the other with delta greater than or eOual to &48 degrees ;9arge curve<. Calues of Small or 9arge can be selected from the Cur+e drop'down bo to indicate which of these two curves should be used for computations. !alc Press to calculate the curve parameters. The -esults page shows the results of the calculation= "orth is the northing coordinate of the RP point. East is the easting coordinate of the RP point. Ell 0t is the height of the RP point. -a&ius of the curve. 9ength of the curve. Chor& is the distance between the starting and ending points ;tangent points< of the curve. ,egree Cur+e defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of the curve with a length of &88 units. ,egree Chor& defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of the curve whose chord is &88 units long. ,elta is the internal angle from center to tangent points. Tangent is the distance between the point of intersection of the tangents at the starting and ending points, and the ending point.
71212
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Cal'*late Fol e&
E ternal is the shortest distance beween the point of intersection and the curve ;along the line @oining the point of intersection to the radius point<. )i& 5r& is the length of the line segment between the curve and the chord on the line @oining the point of intersection to the radius point. Segment is the area of a circle bounded by a chord and the minor arc that it cuts off. Sector is the area of a circle bounded by two radii and the minor arc they determine. Fillet is the area between the arc of a circle and the two tangents at the end points of the arc. Save Saves the results of the calculation. *nly the points with chec5 mar5s ne t to them will be saved.
1adi!' E P int'
The Radius D Points !*#* tas5 computes the parameters, and the coordinates of the center of a curve ;RP point< given the starting ;P! point< and ending points ;PT point< of the curve, and a radius parameter. The -a&ius B Point page contains the initial data for the tas5= P! Point Set the Point of !urvature. It can be manually entered, selected from the map or from the list of ,ob points. PT Point Set the Point of Tangency. It can be manually entered, selected from the map or from the list of ,ob points. Radius>.eg !urve>.eg !hord Set the radius parameter of the curve. Turn Set the direction of turn, relative to the P! Point. !urve
P/N 7010-0492
71313
Cal'*late
Set the curve in the circle that should be considered. The radius, and the P! and PT points define two curves ' one with delta less than or eOual to &48 degrees ;Small curve<, and the other with delta greater than or eOual to &48 degrees ;9arge curve<. RP Point $nter the name, code, and attributes of the computed radius point. !alc Press to calculate the curve parameters and the coordinates of the RP point. The -esults Page shows the results of the calculation= "orth is the northing coordinate of the RP point. East is the easting coordinate of the RP point. Ell 0t is the height of the RP point. -a&ius of the curve. 9ength of the curve. Chor& is the distance between the starting and ending points ;tangent points< of the curve. ,egree Cur+e defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of the curve with a length of &88 units. ,egree Chor& defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of the curve whose chord is &88 units long. ,elta is the internal angle from center to tangent points. Tangent is the distance between the point of intersection of the tangents at the starting and ending points, and the ending point. E ternal is the shortest distance beween the point of intersection and the curve ;along the line @oining the point of intersection to the radius point<. )i& 5r& is the length of the line segment between the curve and the chord on the line @oining the point of intersection to the radius point. Segment is the area of a circle bounded by a chord and the minor arc that it cuts off. Sector is the area of a circle bounded by two radii and the minor arc they determine. Fillet is the area between the arc of a circle and the two tangents at the end points of the arc.
71414
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Cal'*late Fol e&
Save Saves the results of the calculation. *nly the points with chec5 mar5s ne t to them will be saved.
Inter'ecti n
Intersection dialog can be used to compute the intersection point or points given two 5nown points and either the direction or distance from the 5nown point. The Intersection Page contains the initial data for the Intersection tas5. Point & Select the first point. This can be manually entered, selected from the @ob list, or map. A?imuth>.istance>A? to Pt Select the parameter that will be entered for the first point. This can be done by clic5ing this button. The te t indicates what the value will be interpreted as. %or A? to Pt, select another point, and the a?imuth from point & to this point will indicate the direction. Point ( Select the second point. This can be manually entered, selected from the ,ob list, or map. A?imuth>.istance>A? to Pt Select the parameter that will be entered for the first point. This can be done by clic5ing this button. The te t indicates what the value will be interpreted as. %or A? to Pt, select another point, and the a?imuth from point ( to this point will indicate the direction. !*#* Point Select the name and !ode for the result of the calculation. !alc Starts the calculation process. The -esults Page shows the results of the calculation.
P/N 7010-0492
71010
Cal'*late
"orth= the North local coordinate of the first>second found point. East= the $ast local coordinate of the first>second found point. Ell ht= the height of the first>second found point. Save Saves the results of the calculation. *nly the points with chec5 mar5s ne t to them will be saved.
Calc!lat r
The calculator is a powerful tool to do all sorts of calculations and conversions. It is very easy to use. Type in the entire eOuation you want to calculate, press eOuals, and the result is shown. Input %ield This field is where calculations are done. It will accept an entire calculation, and then once eOuals is pressed it will calculate everything at once. Result %ield *nce eOuals is pressed the result is calculated and presented here. This field is also used as the y or theta values for rectangular>polar conversions. Previous Result %ield *nce eOuals is pressed the previous result is moved up to this field. This field is also used as the or r values for rectangular>polar conversions. sin %unction that calculates the sine. cos %unction that calculates the cosine. tan %unction that calculates the tangent.
71111
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Cal'*lato&
arcsin %unction that calculates the arcsine. arccos %unction that calculates the arccosine. arctan %unction that calculates the arctangent. log %unction that calculates the logarithmic value base &8. ln %unction that calculates the natural logorithmic value or base e. sOuare root %unction that calculates the sOuare root of a value. sOuared %unction that calculates the sOuare of a value. inverse %unction that calculates the inverse of a value or &> . nth power %unction that calculates the nth power of a value in the format power. percent !onverts the value to a percent or >&88. "! !lears the memory. "R Recalls the memory value indicated by " in the input field. "S Saves the already computed result into memory. ":
P/N 7010-0492
71717
Cal'*late
Adds the already computed result to the value in memory. Rad .eg %unction that converts radians to degrees. .eg Rad %unction that converts degrees to radians. #rad .eg %unction that converts gradians to degrees. .eg #rad %unction that converts degrees to gradians. .eg ."S %unction that converts degrees to degrees minutes seconds notation. ."S .eg %unction that converts degrees minutes seconds notation to degrees. Rec Pol %unction that converts rectangular coordiantes ; y< to polar ;r theta<. This is done by using both result fields, the top one being , bottom one being y. $nter the values and clic5 Rec Pol and it will convert the top value to r and bottom to theta. ."S .eg %unction that converts polar coordiantes ;r theta< to rectangular ; y<. This is done by using both result fields, the top one being r, bottom one being theta. $nter the values and clic5 Pol Rec and it will convert the top value to and bottom to y. ."S: Adds the left and right values assuming both are in ."S form. ."S' Subtract the right value from the left assuming both are in ."S form. e The constant e, base of the natural logarithm.
71515
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Cal'*lato&
pi The constant pi, the circumference to diameter ratio for any circle. ! !lears out all the fields. a' 0ac5space, removes the last entry. copy If the calculator was started from an edit field, it copies the value bac5 to that field. std 0rings up the standard calculator. .eg If this is showing, it means the calculator is wor5ing in degrees. #rad If this is showing, it means the calculator is wor5ing in gradians. Rad If this is showing, it means the calculator is wor5ing in radians. :>' Alternates the value between positive and negative.
Calc!lat r
The calculator is a powerful tool to do all sorts of calculations and conversions. It is very easy to use. Type in the entire eOuation you want to calculate, press eOuals, and the result is shown. Input %ield This field is where calculations are done. It will accept an entire calculation and then once eOuals is pressed it will calculate everything at once. Result %ield
P/N 7010-0492
71919
Cal'*late
*nce eOuals is pressed the result is calculated and presented here. This field is also used as the y or theta values for rectangular>polar conversions. Previous Result %ield *nce eOuals is pressed the previous result is moved up to this field. This field is also used as the or r values for rectangular>polar conversions. sOuare root %unction that calculates the sOuare root of a value. sOuared %unction that calculates the sOuare of a value. inverse %unction that calculates the inverse of a value or &> . nth power %unction that calculates the nth power of a value in the format power. percent !onverts the value to a percent or >&88. "! !lears the memory. "R Recalls the memory value indicated by " in the input field. "S Saves the already computed result into memory. ": Adds the already computed result to the value in memory. ! !lears out all the fields. a' X
72020
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Cal'*lato&
0ac5space, removes the last entry. copy If the calculator was started from an edit field, it copies the value bac5 to that field. sci 0rings up the scientific calculator. :>' Alternates the value between positive and negative.
Calc!late Area
0y Points !omputes the area of a polygon with 5nown vertices. )inge !omputes the coordinates of a point, which when inserted between the starting and ending points of a pointlist, forms a polygon of 5nown area. 9ine !omputes the coordinates of points, which along with two 5nown points form a Ouadrilateral of the 5nown area.
C /p Area
The !omp Area !*#* tas5 computes the area of a polygon with 5nown vertices.
P/N 7010-0492
72121
Cal'*late
The %rea page contains data needed for the tas5 and a window for the plot of the polygon= Point 9ist Select the name of the Point 9ist, 9ine'or3 or %rea that contains vertices of the polygon. The name can be entered manually or selected from the list. The arrow buttons can be used to modify the order of the points to obtain the correct shape of the polygon. !alc Press to calculate the area of the polygon. The -esults Page shows the results of the calculation= %rea of the polygon in ;,ob2nits<X( and in acres. Point 9ist is the list of points constituting the polygon vertices in the correct order.
3n =n Area " Hin$e

The 6nown Area )inge method computes the coordinates of a point, which when inserted between the starting and ending points of a point list, forms a polygon of the 5nown area. The %rea Pages are a wi?ard that contain the data needed for the tas5, the list of points in the selected point list, and a window for the plot of the point list. The first %rea page contains= Point9ist Set the name of the point list. This can be entered manually, selected from the list of ,ob Point 9ists. 9ist of Points .isplays the list of points in the selected point list along with their codes. 2se the arrow 5eys to change the order of the points in the list for this !*#* tas5. Ne t Press to proceed to the ne t page of the wi?ard. The second %rea page contains=
72222
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Cal'*lato&
A?imuth Set the 5nown a?imuth from the first point in the list, where the hinge point is located. Area Set the area of the polygon in either ;,ob2nits<X( or in acres. !ogo Point Set the name of the calculated hinge point. !ode Set the !ode and attributes for the calculated hinge point. 0ac5 Press to go to the previous %rea page to modify the pointlist. !alc Press to calculate the coordinates of the hinge point. The -esults Page shows the results of the calculation= "orth is the northing coordinate of the hinge point. East is the easting coordinate of the hinge point. Ell 0t is the height of the hinge point. Total %rea of the polygon in ;,ob2nits<X( or acres. Plot %rea is the area enclosed by the points in the pointlists alone, in ;,ob2nits<X( or acres. ,i$$erence is the difference between the Total Area and the Plot Area. Save Saves the results of the calculation. *nly the points with chec5 mar5s against them will be saved.
3n =n Area " 4ine

The 6nown Area 9ine method computes the coordinates of points, which along with two 5nown points form a Ouadrilateral of 5nown area. The %rea Page contains the data needed for the tas5= Start Pt
P/N 7010-0492
72323
Cal'*late
Set the name of the 5nown starting point. It can be entered manually, selected from the map or the list of ,ob Points. $nd Pt Set the name of the 5nown ending point. It can be entered manually, selected from the map or the list of ,ob Points. A?& Set the a?imuth of the line emanating from the start point ;9ine &< to the calculated C5.5 Pt 1 point. A?( Set the a?imuth of the line emanating from the end point ;9ine (< to the calculated C5.5 Pt 2 point. Area Set the 5nown area of the Ouadrilateral in either ;,ob 2nits<X( or acres. A?imuth>Parallel Set the a?imuth of the line that will intersect 9ine& at !*#* Pt & and 9ine( at !*#* Pt ( with an area of the Ouadrilateral eOual to the 5nown area. If Parallel is set, the line !*#* Pt &'Q!*#* Pt ( will be parallel to the line defined by the Start and $nd Points. !ogo Pt& Set the name, code and attributes of the first calculated point. !ogo Pt( Set the name, code and attributes of the second calculated point. !alc Press to calculate the coordinates of the two points. The -esults Page shows the following results of the calculation. The coordinates are displayed for both the computed points= "orth is the northing coordinate of one of the two points. East is the easting coordinate of one of the two points. Ell 0t is the height of one of the two points. %rea of the Ouadrilateral in ;,ob2nits<X( or acres.
72424
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Cal'*lato&
Plot %rea is the area enclosed by the points in the pointlists alone, in ;,ob2nits<X( or acres. ,i$$erence is the difference between the Total Area and the Plot Area. Save Saves the results of the calculation. *nly the points with chec5 mar5s ne t to them will be saved.
C rner An$le
!alculates the angle between two lines, a start line and an end line, which have a common mid point. Start Point The point that defines the first side of the angle. $ither enter manually or select from the map or from the list. "id Point The point that defines the corner of the angle. $ither enter manually or select from the map or from the list. $nd Point The point that defines the second side of the angle. $ither enter manually or select from the map or from the list. !alc !alculates the corner angle.
Calc!late Off'et'
9ine *ffset .efines a line between two points used for computing point locations relative to the line.
P/N 7010-0492
72020
Cal'*late
!urve *ffset .efines a curve ;section of an arc< used for computing point locations in relation to the curve. Road *ffset !omputes point locations relative to the selected road or alignment.
4ine E Off'et
The !*#* 9ine D *ffset dialog allows you to define a line between two points used for computing point locations relative to the line. Start Point The starting point of the line. The line is defined by its a?imuth, a?imuth to another point, or the $nd point of the line. $nd Point>A?imuth The direction of the line. It can be set through the a?imuth of the line or the ending point of the line. )t !omp The type of height computations for the computed points. It can be= 0t o! Start #t +.ei%.t o! t.e startin% point," The computed points will have the same height as the starting point of the line. 8nterpolate 0t" The height of the computed points will be computed through linear interpolation using the height of the starting and ending points of the line. Num Subs .esignates the number of subdivisions if it is desired to subdivide the line. %or instance a value of - indicates that you want to compute four points by subdividing the line in three eOual segments. Include Transition Points Bhether to include transition points if they do not fall on a designated station. SS ;Start Station< The starting station ;chainage< of the line. 72121
Cal'*lato&
C!r8e E Off'et'
The !urve D *ffsets dialog function allows you to define a curve ;section of an arc< used for computing point locations in relation to the curve. P! Point The Point of !urve, the starting point of the arc. PT Point The Point of Tangency, the ending point of the arc. Radius> .eg !urve> .eg !hord The radius parameters of the curve. 9ength>!hord>Tangent>"id *rd>$ tern>.elta Is the length parameter of the curve. Num Subs .esignates the number of subdivisions if it is desired to subdivide the line. %or instance a value of - indicates that you want to compute four points by subdividing the line in three eOual segments. Include Transition Points Bhether to include transition points if they do not fall on a designated station. Turn Indicates which side the center point of the curve is located. )t !omp The type of height computations for the computed points. !an be= 0t o! Start #t +.ei%.t o! t.e startin% point," The computed points will have the same height as the starting point of the line. 8nterpolate 0t" The height of the computed points will be computed through linear interpolation using the height of the starting and ending points of the line. SS The starting station ;chainage< of the line.
P/N 7010-0492
72727
Cal'*late
1 ad Off'et
The !*#* Road *ffset dialog allows you to select a road or alignment used for computing point locations relative to their selection. Road>) Alnt>C Alnt The road or alignment to be used for computing points. !an be entered manually, or chosen from the list. Start Sta The starting point of the selected road of alignment, the distance from the beginning.
Stati n E Off'et'
The !*#* Station D *ffsets dialog is used to define stationing which is used to compute the points location in relation to lines or curves. Station The starting or current station. The two arrows to the right allow you to decrease or increase the station by the interval specified in the Station Interval shown in the ne t line. Station $nd The desired end station if you wish to compute several points. The two arrows to the right allow you to decrease or increase the station by the interval specified in the Station Interval shown in the ne t line. Interval The station interval. Right *ffset>9eft *ffset The right or left offset of the sta5eout point with respect to the line at the station shown on the Station field. 2p>.own The 2p or .own )eight offset with respect to the height of the line at the station.
72525
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Cal'*lato&
Point I. The name of the current or starting computed point. !ode The feature code used for the computed points.
Calc!late Ad<!'t
Rotate Rotates the selected points around a specific point. Translate "oves a group of points. Scale Scales the distances of a range of points relative to a 0ase Point. (. Transform Performs (. transformations using a list of point pairs to get the transformation parameters. Traverse Performs traverse ad@ustments that apply corrections to the individual latitudes, departures, angles and>or elevations in order to ma5e them meet given conditions.
1 tate
The Rotate tas5 rotates the selected points around a specific point. Select points
P/N 7010-0492
72929
Cal'*late
Select the points for rotation. These points can be chosen from the map, from the ,obs 9ist, or by entering a Range using the 2y -ange button. Rotation Point Select the point which is to be the center of rotation. Rotation "ethod Select the rotation method. This can be by entering a Rotation Angle or by entering the *ld and New A?imuths. !alc Rotates the points. The results can be seen through the $dit Points dialog.
Tran'late
The Translate tas5 allows you to move a group of points. Select points Select the points for translation. These points can be chosen from the map, from the ,obs 9ist, or by entering a Range using the 2y -ange button. Translate 0y Select the method for translation. This can be by !oords>Pts or A?,.ist,)t. Coor&s>Pts= all the selected points will be moved in the same direction and distance as between the points ;locations<, set by the ne t two fields= %rom Pt ;%rom !rd< and To Pt ;To !rd<. In the first case, define only the point I., in the second case ' the local coordinates and the height of the location. %1,,ist,0t= all the selected points will be moved in the specified direction by a specified distance. These parameters are set through the 0earing ;A?imuth< field, )? .ist and Cert .ist fields. !alc Translates the points. The results can be seen through the $dit Points dialog.
73030
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Cal'*lato&
Scale
The Scale tas5 allows you to scale the distances of a range of points relative to a 0ase Point. Select points Select the points for scaling. These points can be chosen from the map, from the ,obs 9ist, or by entering a Range using the 2y -ange button. 0ase Pt Sets the point that is the reference point for the scale transformation. Scale %actor The scale factor of the coordinate transformation. Scale )eights !hec5 this field if the height values should also be scaled. !alc Scales the points. The results can be seen through the $dit Points dialog.
#2 Tran'f r/
The (. Transform dialog contains a list of point pairs used for getting the transformation parameters. Add Select the Add button to enter pairs of points > plane positions. $dit Select the Edit button to change an e isting point pair. .elete Select the Delete button to remove an e isting point pair. Ne t Select the Ne4t button to move to the (. Transform Parameters page.
P/N 7010-0492
73131
Cal'*late
Tra8er'e Ad<!'t/ent
0efore the result of a tra+erse becomes applicable for determining to be located from the traverse stations, the traverse must assured to be mathematically consistent. The misclosures in latitudes, departures, angles and>or elevations must be ad@usted out. The process of applying corrections to the individual latitudes, departures, angles and>or elevations in order to ma5e them meet given conditions, is called tra+erse a&#ustment. Start Point The station on which the traverse originates. $nd Point The station on which the traverse closes. Ad@ust $levations $nable this chec5 bo to include elevations ad@ustment if it is needed to determine elevations in the traverse. Ad@ust Sideshots $nable this chec5 bo to include sideshots in ad@ustment. !urvature refraction If you need to consider $arth curvature and atmospheric refraction corrections, set the value of curvature refraction to 8.&+ or 8.(8. ,ob to store the results Set the name of the new @ob where the results of ad@usted traverse.
Ad<!'t/ent Cl 'e
Sets the methods of traverse ad@ustment. Apply !ompass Rule $nable this chec5 bo to ad@ust the traverse by the compass rule. Apply Angle 0alance $nable this chec5 bo to ad@ust angles in the traverse. !losing Angle
73232
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Cal'*lato&
Shows the closing angle for the traverse ad@ustment.
Ad<!'t/ent 1e'!lt'
Results of ad@ustment contain the following information= d Ad@ustment methods d Names of the start and end points of traverse d Bhether an ad@ustment of elevations and ad@ustment of sideshots are made or not d !oefficient of refraction d Path to the new @ob with ad@usted traverse d Information about control points d *riginal coordinates of a traverse station d Ad@usted coordinates of a traverse station d .ifferences between original and ad@usted coordinates of a traverse station ;!hange< d Total difference for the traverse station ;9inear< Also, if the Ad@ust Sideshots option has been chosen= d *riginal coordinates of the sideshots d Ad@usted coordinates of the sideshots d .ifferences between original and ad@usted coordinates of the sideshots ;!hange< d Total difference of the sideshots ;9inear<
P int Pair Inf

The Point Pair In$o dialog selects the pairs of points or coordinates to obtain transformation parameters. %rom Pt>%rom !rd !hanges the field to enter either the point or coordinates from which the parameters will be calculated. To Pt>To !rd
P/N 7010-0492
73333
Cal'*late
!hanges the field to enter either the point or coordinates from which the parameters will be calculated.
#2 Tran'f r/ Para/eter'
The (. Transform Parameters dialog displays the transformation parameters which will be applied to the set of points needing transformation. F%rom.. ToF Tap the button to select points to transform from the By -an%e dialog. "ap Tap the button to select points to transform from the map. 9ist Tap the button to select points to transform from a list. 9ayer Tap the button to transform all points from a layer selected in the /ayer dialog. 0ac5 Returns to the <D Trans!orm dialog. !alc Performs the two dimentional transform and displays a successful message.
Tra8er'e Calc
The Traverse !alc tas5 calculates Traverse,and Sideshot points, based on hori?ontal, and Certical *ffsets along a direction which is defined by an a?imuth or right, left or deflection angles. The Tra+erse Calc page displays the initial data for the traverse tas5= %rom Point Set the occupation point ;the traverse point<. It can be manually entered, chosen from the map or the list of ,ob points. A?imuth>Angle Right>Angle 9eft>.eflection 73434
Cal'*lato&
Set the a?imuth from the 5nown point to the calculated point. The a?imuth can be entered as is, computed from the right or left angles, or deflection entered in this field and 0ac5sight information. The angle to the right is the angle at the 5nown point from the bac5sight point to the calculated point in a cloc5wise direction. The angle to the left is the angle at the 5nown point from the bac5sight point to the calculated point in an counter cloc5wise direction. The deflection is the angle at the 5nown point between the prolongation of the line from the bac5sight point and the line to the calculated point. ). #rd>#nd Set the grid or ground hori?ontal distance along the a?imuth line. To alternate between grid or ground press the button. Cert .ist Set the Certical .istance along the a?imuth line. To Point Set the name of the calculated point. !ode Set the code and attributes associated with the calculated point. 0S Point Press to display the 0S Point dialog that allows you to enter the 0ac5sight Point or 0ac5sight A?imuth. If a 0S point has not been entered, then an A?imuth is reOuired. In this case if an angle value is entered as Angle Right, Angle 9eft, or .eflection, this value will be considered as a?imuth. SideShot Press to compute the coordinates of the To Point, based on the entered values for A?imuth>Angle Right>Angle 9eft>.eflection, )ori?ontal and Certical distances. The %rom Point does not change, and To Point is incremented to the ne t new Point in the database. Traverse
P/N 7010-0492
73030
Cal'*late
Press to compute the coordinates of the To Point, based on the entered values for A?imuth>Angle Right>Angle 9eft>.eflection, )ori?ontal and Certical distances. The %rom Point changes to the To Point, and the To Point changes to the ne t new name in the database. The -esults page shows the results of the calculation of all the sideshots of traverse tas5s= "orth is the northing coordinate of the SideShot>Traverse point. East is the easting coordinate of the SideShot>Traverse point. Ell 0t is the height of the SideShot>Traverse point. From Point of the tas5. To Point of the tas5. %1imuth from the %rom Point to the To Point. 2earing from the %rom Point to the To Point. 01 ,istance is the hori?ontal distance between the %rom Point and the To Point. 7ert ,istance is the vertical distance between the %rom Point and the To Point. Save Saves the results of the calculation. *nly the points with chec5 mar5s ne t to them will be saved.
6S P int
The 0S Point dialog allows you to enter the bac5sight a?imuth for the Traverse tas5 of !*#*. The a?imuth can be computed from the Tra+erse From Point to a bac5sight point or can be entered manually. 0S Point>0S A?imuth> Set the bac5sight point location or the bac5sight a?imuth. The bac5sight point may be entered manually, selected from the map, or from the list of ,ob Points. !ode If a bac5sight point is entered, the code and string of the point are displayed.
73131
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Cal'*lato&
Calc!late 2TM
.T" Columes !alculates the cut, fill and area between two .T"s. !reate .T" !reates a new .T". !ontour .T" Represents .T" data along contour lines.
2TM D l!/e'
To perform volume calculations= &. In the Final field, select the .T" on which you want the volume calculations to be performed. $ither manually enter the name of an e isting .T" in the edit field or press the 9ist selection button and choose the .T" from the list. Bhen the .T" selection changes an information message will display the ma imum and minimum Northing and $asting values for the area covered by the .T". (. %rom the DTM drop'down menu, select one of four options for volumes calculations. d If DTM is selected, select another e isting .T". $ither manually enter the name of the second .T" or press the 9ist selection button and choose the .T" from the list. The plots will display both of the .T" selected. d If None is selected, the plot will display only the final .T". The plane of pro@ection of the final .T" will be defined as a flat plane at a fi ed elevation of ?ero.
P/N 7010-0492
73737
Cal'*late
d If Elevation is selected, the plot will display only the final .T". The plane of pro@ection of the final .T" will be defined as a flat plane at a fi ed elevation. $ither manually enter the fi ed elevation in the edit field or press the "ap or the 9ist selection button to select a point in the @ob whose elevation will be used as the fi ed elevation. After the point selection dialog has closed the edit field will display the elevation of the selected point. d If #lane is selected, the plane of pro@ection of the final .T" will be defined by three separate points. $ither manually enter the names of the three points in the edit fields or use the associated "ap and 9ist selection buttons to select these points from the @ob. -. Press the Calc button to calculate the cut and fill volumes and pro@ected areas of a .T" to another .T" or a plane of pro@ection. Bhen a successful .T" calculation has been performed the Results tab will display the calculation data. A warning message displays if any of the fields is empty or contains a name that does not e ist.
Creatin$ 2TM
!reate .T" allows you to create a Topcon tn@ Tin by selecting points from their @ob. e isting point lists, e isting areas, e isting linewor5. .T" is a three'dimensional display of transformed elevation data. .T" describes the topographic surface with a networ5 of digiti?ed points and optional brea5lines. To create a .T" &. In the Points>Point 9ist>9ine'or3>%rea field, select the current method of selection of data reOuired to create the .T". d %or Points, in the Sel Pts drop'down list, choose an option to select multiple points in the @ob for creating the .T"= d All ' all the @ob points. d By -an%e ' points from a range. "ore... d By Code ' points of a selected code. "ore... 73535
Cal'*lato&
d By Code Strin% ' points of a selected code string. "ore... d By -adius ' points around a selected point at a certain distance. "ore... d From Map ' points selected graphically from the map "ore... d From /ist ' points from a list of points. "ore... d From /ayer ' points on a selected layer. "ore... d %or Point 9ist, press the 9ist selection button and select an e isting point list in the @ob. "ore... The list name will appear in the edit field. The name can also be manually entered into the edit field and added to the point selection by pressing the o5 button. d %or 9ine'or3 and %rea, press either the "ap selection button and select an e isting linewor5>area from the map ;more...< or press the 9ist selection button and select an e isting linewor5>area from the list ;more...<. The name will appear in the edit field. The name can also be manually entered into the edit field and added to the point selection by pressing the o5 button. (. The list will display the points curently selected, and the plot will display the created .T". -. To obtain information about a single point highlighted in the list, use the Info button. +. If reOuired, chec5 mar5 the Inclu&e 2rea3lines bo to apply brea5lines and e clusion areas to the .T". 0rea5lines are linear elements that describe changes in smoothness or continuity of the surface.
NOTICE
NOTICE
The points #hose feature code is fla$$ed as &ein$ a &rea+line or e'clusion area $et applied to the ?TM in the order that they appear in the point list. Gou can alter the e'clusion areas and &rea+lines &y movin$ their points up or do#n in the list.
P/N 7010-0492
73939
/. !lic5 Sa+e to save the .T" created from the selected points in the .T" folder by default. The default name will be newT8N'TN@. 1. Bhen a valid .T" has been created, the -esults tab displays the results updated dynamically as you alter the data. 3. The "ap tab displays the created .T" as the current selected points and the triangulation lines. 4. A warning message displays if less than three or no points have been selected, or there are not enough points to create a .T" since several have been e cluded because their code was flagged as not to be used in a .T" or they are incomputable in the current system. To e&it the ,T) &. To view a point on the plot, highlight the point in the list. (. To see a "ap view of the current .T", double'clic5 in the plot window. -. To delete any point from the .T"= d )ighlight the point in the list. d !lic5 the .elete button. The .T" will be updated. +. To alter the boundary of the currently selected .T"= d Press the E&it 2oun&ary button. %ind out more... Icons you can use "A#N$T %ield general buttons and icons are described here...
74040
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
General Ic n'
The .elete button is used to delete the selected points in the point list. The Info button is used to display information on a single point highlighted in the list.
The 2p ;and .own < arrow button is used to move the selected points up ;and down< in the list control. If the current selection is at the top or bottom or nothing is selected the buttons will be disabled accordingly. The Plot button is used to hide and show the plot window. The Arrow control button allows you to use the 5eyboard arrow 5eys to move points inside the list. *pens the list of points. *pens a map. !onfirms settings, closes the dialog, and returns to the previous dialog.
Editin$ 6 !ndar;
The boundary selection dialog contains a list of points, which bound the .T", the general plot of the .T" with the boundary in red. To edit the boundary=
P/N 7010-0492
74141
&. If reOuired, move points up and down the list to change the order of the boundary. The .T" will be updated to reflect the changes to the point order. (. To delete a point from the boundary, highlight the point in the list and clic5 the red minus icon. The .T" will be updated. -. 2se the "ap or 9ist selection button to select points from all of the points in the .T" to add to the boundary.
NOTICE
NOTICE
/hen you select a point in the &oundary Map selection dialo$ the point is added &et#een the end points of the se$ment #hich is closest to the selected point. After each selection the ?TM $ets updated to sho# your selection. /hen you return to the Edit 0oundary dialo$ the point list $ets updated to the order of the &oundary in the map. %ind out description of the icons on the dialog here...
C nt !rin$ 2TM
This dialog allows you to contour an e isting Topcon TN@ T8N. !ontouring .T" is a method of transforming elevation data into a contoured surface, representing data along contour lines. To create the contours on the .T"= &. $nter the DTM Name manually in the edit field or press the 9ist selection button to select an e isting .T" from the list. (. The plot window will display the currently selected .T". -. Press the "e t button to set the parameters reOuired for contouring the .T". +. $nter an Contour 8nterval between the contour lines in the edit field as reOuired. The !ontour line interval must be greater than 8.88&m. The difference between the start and end elevations is divided by the interval to get the number of contour lines.
74242
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
/. The Start Elevation edit field initially shows the lowest elevation in the selected .T". If reOuired, you can enter a different value. 1. The End Elevation edit field initially shows the highest elevation in the selected .T". If reOuired, you can enter a different value. 3. Press the Save button to store the contoured .T" and generate the contour lines in the @ob. The lines will be added to the @ob as lines with the .T" name and an integer value starting at & which ma5es the line uniOue. The results of contouring will be displayed on the -esults tab. The Map tab will display the current selected .T" as well as the contour lines in red.
Notes2
C-a#te& 5
Ma#
P/N 7010-0492
5-1
Ma#
Map
The "ap screen displays the plot of the current @ob, the viewing tools and the scale. The "ap maintains the scale after changing the status of the main map.
Clic9 a t l ic n t exec!te the c //and:
Eoom In Eooms the plot inwards. Eoom *ut Eooms the plot outwards. Eoom Bindow Selects a frame of ob@ects for ?oom'in displayM draw from left to right to get the ob@ect you want. Eoom All .isplays all ob@ects in the @ob. Eoom 0y Point Selects a point to center the plot. Properties Selects the map properties to display. Also, pressing and holding the stylus on the map area displays the "ap Properties option. The "ain "ap allows you to edit @ob data and to sta5eout desired ob@ects. *n the "ain "ap, tap the ob@ect to highlight it. )old the stylus on the selected ob@ect until a pop'up menu displays. The menu options depend on the ob@ect selected. 2se the appropriate item from the pop'up menu.
5-2
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Ma#
Map Pr pertie'
The "ap Properties dialog allows the user to customi?e the map view adding to the points showing their properties ;names, codes, heights, etc.<, also displaying the Auto Topo points. To enable the points displaying, place a chec5 mar5 in the Sho' Points field. Along with the points their names,co&es,icons, heights, auto topo and>or scanne& points can be displayed. Also it is possible to display roa&s, their stations and templates, lines, their stations and start each time from the current position. !hec5ing the Current Position field also means, if the current position moves off the edge of the map it will automatically snap bac5 to the center.
/ InAO!tA5ind =
%or display customi?ing, clic5 7ie'/@8oom In, or 7ie'/@8oom 5ut, or 7ie'/@8oom =in&o' to ?oom the plot inwards, or outwards, or allows the user to select an area to ?oom.
F F
/ All / 6; P int
To view all ob@ects in the map, clic5 7ie'/@8oom %ll.
To select a point for centering, clic5 7ie'/@8oom 2y Point and choose the point in the Select point dialog.
P/N 7010-0492
5-3
Ma#
Notes2
5-4
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
C-a#te& 9
Conne'tions
C nnecti n'
This dialog allows you to perform the following tas5s= &. To select a device type and a configuration style to wor5 at the site. %ind out more....evice connection (. To enable a connection prompt upon starting the @ob. %ind out more....evice connection -. To connect with "A#N$T $nterprise web'server and the pro@ect for data e change. %ind out more...$nterprise !onnection +. To enable automatic connection with the networ5 server. %ind out more...Networ5 connection To enable automatic disconnection with the networ5 server. %ind out more...Networ5 connection
General C nnecti n Settin$'

The #eneral tab of the !onnections dialog allows you to change the type of the device to wor5 and to select a @ob configuration before connecting to the device. .PS Select the #PS type of instrument and the configuration to wor5 in the current @ob. 5ptical Select the *ptical type of instrument and the configuration to wor5 in the current @ob.
P/N 7010-0492
9-0
Conne'tions
Prompt at startup 2nchec5ing this bo will prevent the program from connecting to an instrument until you clic5 the !onnections icon on the main folder or enter a Survey or Sta5eout dialog. )owever, the Networ5 settings will be available. Iou can also set a prompt for connection at startup in the #lobal dialog. Connect>,isconnect !lic5ing this button initiates the connection to the instrument associated with the currently selected configuration or close communication, respectively. %ind out more on 0luetooth connection.
6l!et
th
2e8ice 2i'c 8er;

Select 2luetooth ,e+ice dialog lists all visible 0luetooth .evices. $ach deviceYs name is displayed. If the name cannot be resolved, 0luetooth 2niOue Address is displayed instead. Type of device and its services are displayed if the device provides this information. The dialog title displays the type of device that application tries to connect to. If a device is not present in the list or some devices did not report their names in a timely manner, try refreshing the list using the -e$resh button. If the device is still not listed, then the distance to it can be too large or the device can be connected to a different controller. !onnection with the device is possible even if its name was not resolved and only 0luetooth 2niOue Address is listed. Select button will initiate authentication with device. If 0luetooth hardware is disabled ;powered off< or the controller has an unsupported 0luetooth stac5, a warning will be displayed. !urrently only the "icrosoft 0luetooth stac5 is supported.
9-2
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Conne'tions
A!thenticati n
The application maintains authentication information independently of 0luetooth 2I in the *perating System. There is no need to pair devices beforehand, the application will perform the pairing. The application supports connections with devices that do not reOuire a PIN code. To use this feature, unchec5 the -e*uire PI" chec5 bo . If the PIN code is provided and a connection is successful, the application will store the PIN code in a protected area for future use. Press Connect button to initiate a connection. If a connection succeeds, 0luetooth 2niOue Address and its authentication will be stored. Ne t time the application will not display the .evice .iscovery.
6l!et
th C nnecti n
Bhen the application tries to establish a connection with 0luetooth port, it displays the %ccessing 2luetooth ,e+ice dialog. The title of the dialog displays the type of device that application tries to connect to. If a connection cannot be established in a timely manner, the dialog will automatically stop the connection. A connection can be cancelled manually and with the Cancel button. It is possible to initiate the .evice .iscovery procedure using the Change ,e+ice button. Also, the device discovery can be initiated by clearing the Connect to the last 2T &e+ice chec5 bo before connecting.
Enterpri'e C nnecti n
The $nterprise tab allows you to establish a connection with an enterprise pro@ect= d $nter your /o%in information for connection to the "agnet $nterprise server. d Select a pro@ect from the Connect to pro(ect drop'down list. Iou can create a new pro@ect using the nearby icon.
P/N 7010-0492
9-3
Conne'tions
d !lic5 Connect to establish the connection. !onnection status displays the result.
Net= r9 C nnecti n Settin$'

The Networ5 tab allows you to manage an automatic connection of the modem to the NTRIP server for Internal !."A and #PRS modems. %uto/Connect Bhen this bo is chec5ed, an automatic connection of the modem is enabled. After clic5ing the bac5 button, the Networ5 tab will display the process of the connection. %ind out more= !onnection to Networ5. If automatic connection is disabled in the !onnections dialog, you can configure the modem from the Status or Topo screens. Chec3 signal *uality Bhen this chec5 bo is selected, the signal Ouality is displayed on the Signal bar. %uto/,isconnect Bhen this chec5 bo is selected, an automatic diconnection and switching off the modem is enabled on e iting "A#N$T %ield.
9-4
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
C-a#te& 10
)ettin. *# GP) )*&$e,

Set!p f lder
0efore conducting the survey you may need to perform some preliminary wor5 that depends upon the current @ob configuration.
Set!p GPS f lder

9ocali?ation !alculates locali?ation parameters of the mathematical coordinate transformation between an original coordinate system, in which the @ob points are measured or given, and a local coordinate system, in which control points are 5nown. %ind out more... Start 0ase Sets the 0ase Receiver in RT6 survey. Status .isplays information about the current position of the #NSS receiver, RT6 status, and the satellite constellation. 6nown Pt Init Initiali?es the receiver using 5nown coordinates for the Rover station.
P/N 7010-0492
10-0
)ettin. *# GP) )*&$e,
mm#PS Init Sets up mm#PS: system for RT6 surveying. Static *ccupation Starts logging data at the point occupied for static observations in PP Static survey. Simulator Sets initial B#S4+ position for #PS simulation.
Stat!'
This allows you to chec5 the status of a #PS: survey. The Status dialog contains information about the current position of the receiver, RT6 status, and the satellite constellation.
Position System 9og )istory "ulti 0ase Status Scatter Plot SCs
P 'iti n
Position page displays= d Total number of the available satellites. The loc5 icon signifies the number of the satellites trac5ed, and the star icon shows the number of satellites used in position determination. d !urrent 2T! time. d !oordinates of the position in the selected coordinate system and units. d P.*P valueM it is a factor depending solely on satellite geometry describing how the uncertainty in the coordinates will depend on
10-2
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
)tat*s
the measurement errors. P.*P is proportional to the estimated position uncertainty. d ) and C stand for )R"S and CR"S, the R"S values of the hori?ontal and vertical coordinates, respectively. d 0ase .ist= slope distance to base antenna. The field is empty if no differential corrections are received. Settings opens the dialog where $levation "as5 or 0ase "a5e At Rover parameter can be changed. *ther pages in the Status dialog= System 9og )istory "ulti 0ase Status Scatter Plot SCs
The icon opens a pop'up menu which varies depending on the configuration type used. "ore...
Stat!' p p"!p /en!

The pop'up menu can contain a different set of the following options depending on the configuration type used Rover Antenna Setup !onfig Radio !onfig *mniSTAR !onfig 0eacon !onfig R$'S& Repeater Reset RT6 or Reset .#PS ' the command that reinitiali?es the receiver. mm#PS: *ptions "ission Planning
P/N 7010-0492
10-3
)ettin. *# GP) )*&$e,
!lear NCRA" ' the command that resets the receiver parameters to factory default values ;such as active antenna input, elevation mas5 and recording interval, and information about the receiverYs internal file system<. This command will not delete any files from the receiver memory. After clearing the NCRA", the receiver will reOuire some time to collect new ephemerides and almanacs ;around &/ minutes<.
S;'te/
*pen the System page to view the information about the current state of the RT6 measurements= d #osition Type ' Indicates the solution type of the position. d Common Sats ' Number of common satellites between the base and rover. d 8nitiali1ed Sats 'Number of satellites initiali?ed. d -adio /in3 'Nuality of the radio lin5. d -T6 A%e ' Age of the last RT6 message in seconds. d -eceiver Memory +6B, ' Available memory in the receiver for storing TPS files. d -eceiver #ower+C, ' Percentage of receiver power remaining. d Controller Memory +6B, ' Available memory in the controller. d Controller #ower+C, ' Percentage of controller power remaining. d Net-T6 +MAC, Status ' Applies to Networ5 RT6 style with "A! corrections selected. Bill display YIesY if "A! is used for position computation. d Base Ma3e at -over ' -e9uires Topcon receiver !)w at rover @'D or .i%.er'If Automatic detection of 0ase "a5e is selected in style settings, this field will report the 0ase "a5e that was detected by the Rover receiver. If the 0ase receiver does not support I#S !lass e tensions to correction formats or if the reOuired RT!" messages were not enabled on the base, this field will report a dash ;'<, and the rover will apply default #9*NASS corrections. Iou can override this by pressing the Settings button in the Status 10-4
)tat*s
dialog or in the Styles Settings ;Advanced<. No 0ase "a5e At Rover will be reported by "A#N$T %ield in this mode. *ther pages in the Status dialog= Position 9og )istory "ulti 0ase Status Scatter Plot SCs
S l!ti n t;pe
Possible solution types= d No Solution ' receiver cannot produce a solution ;not enough satellites or incorrect antenna model< d Autonomous ;Standalone< d .#PS ;!ode'differential< d %loat d %i ed ;RT6< d )P .#PS ' )igh'Precision *mnistar solution d .#PS;C0S< ' indicates .#PS solution produced using code' differential corrections received from an *mnistar satellite T(P
TIP
++GP)? sol*tion +a&6e& in i'ates t-at sol*tion 4as #&o *'e *sin. ++GP)? te'-nolo.,
4 $ Hi't r;
If the 9og )istory is available, a 9og )istory tab is displayed. The 9og )istory tab graphically displays the usage of satellites over time. %or convenience, the field is divided into /'minute portions
P/N 7010-0492
10-0
)ettin. *# GP) )*&$e,
along dotted lines. The starting time and ne t half hour is mar5ed with time labels. *ther pages in the Status dialog= Position System "ulti 0ase Status Scatter Plot SCs
M!lti 6a'e Stat!'

The "ulti 0ase Status page displays the information about the current state of the RT6 measurements in the multiple base configuration. -TC / (se= a chec5mar5 indicates this base station is currently used by the RT6 engine. -TC / I,= the numerical I. of this base station. -TC / 2ase= the name of this base station. ;*nly avaliable if this base is currently in use< -TC / %ge= the age of the last RT6 message received by this base station. -TC / 9in3= the Ouality of the radio lin5 of this base station. -TC / Type= Indicated the solution type of the position ;only avaliable if this base is currently in use< -TC / ,ist= the distance between this base station and the rover. ;*nly avaliable if this base is currently in use< *ther pages in the Status dialog= Position System 9og )istory Scatter Plot SCs
10-1
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
)tat*s
Scatter Pl t
The Scatter Plots tab displays the current receiver position changing in time= either the current receiver vertical position or the hori?ontal position relative to the position in a local ;northing, easting< coordinate system. The buttons on the left of the plot are used to switch between hori?ontal and vertical plots, to ?oom in and out, and to open properties. *ther pages in the Status dialog= Position System 9og )istory "ulti 0ase Status SCs
SD'
The SCs page of the Status dialog displays a graphical representation of the position of the satellites on the s5y or the S>N ratios. Show #PS Shows>hides the #PS satellites images. Show #9NS Shows>hides the #9NS satellites images. #9NS satellites are Zmar5ed with the F:F sign. SNR>S5yplot Toggles the appearance of the dialog to the s5yplot or the signal' to' noise ratio for the satellites. 9ist>Plot Toggles the appearance of the dialog between the graphical representation to the table displaying the satellites parameters= P-"= shows the number of the satellite 0>(= shows whether the satellite is healthy or unhealthy
P/N 7010-0492
10-7
)ettin. *# GP) )*&$e,
E9= shows the elevation angle of the satellite %8= shows the a?imuth of the satellite S"-1= 9& signal to noise ratio S"-2= 9( signal to noise ratio (SE,= shows whether the satellite is used in position computation. Iou can select whether a satellite should be used or not by selecting the corresponding row for the satellite in the list and clic5ing on the 2S$. column header. This will toggle the use of the satellite. *ther pages in the Status dialog= Position System 9og )istory "ulti 0ase Status Scatter Plot
Mi''i n Plannin$
The "ission Planning option enables you to e amine the e pected observation conditions ;such as satellite visibility and P.*P<. This can be done in order to find out the best timing for observations at the specified point. To perform mission planning= &. Select Setup > Status and the Mission #lannin% option from the pop'up menu. (. !onfigure settings for observations in the Mission #lannin% Settin% dialog. "ore... -. *nce the "ission Planning Setting dialog is closed the "ission Planning dialog will calculate and show the position of satellites in the first ten minutes of the specified time on the S3y #lot ;the celestial sphere<. +. The /ocal field displays the date and time ;local time< of the calculation result.
10-5
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
)tat*s
/. The dialog also provides information about the given position as applied to the calculations, the #D&# value, and the number of G#S and G/&NASS. 1. If reOuired, you can hide all the #PS or #9*NASS satellites from the view. To do this, unchec5 the corresponding bo . 3. 2se the appropriate button to calculate and show the satellites in every ten minutes of the specified time= 4. Q or a to move forward or bac5ward, respectively 7. Ia to return to the start time &8. II to pause at any ten'minute interval &&. To view different graphical satellite information, select a desired option from the drop'down selection list= S5y Plot Sat 9ist Sat Num P.*P
Mi''i n Plannin$ Settin$

To configure settings for "ission Planning= &. $nter the coordinates of the current position in one of the two possible ways
d automatically by clic5ing d manually in the current coordinate system after clic5ing
(. Select the Date and Start and End Time of observations as reOuired. -. If reOuired, change the $levation "as5 from the default &/ degrees for a desired value.
P/N 7010-0492
10-9
)ettin. *# GP) )*&$e,
Satellite 4i't
The Satellite 9ist option allows you to view graphically the availability of either #PS or #9*NASS satellites changing in the specified time.
Satellite N!/&er
The Satellite Number option allows you to view graphically the total number of #PS and #9*NASS satellites changing in the specified time.
P2OP
The P.*P option allows you to view graphically the P.*P value changing in the specified time.
Start Base
The Start 0ase dialog contains information about the 0ase receiver and can be used for setting the 0ase Receiver. Point $nter the name of the point where the 0ase receiver is located. It can be chosen from the map or the list of the @ob points, or can be entered manually. !oordinates The coordinates of the base position in the selected coordinate system. Auto Pos $nables you to measure the position of the current point. *nce pressed, the button changes its name to Stop. Press it to stop logging the position. The average coordinates will be displayed. The Pos field appears and shows the number of the measurements used for averaging. Ant )t 101010
)ta&t <ase
The measured antenna height and type ;vertical or slant< of measurement. Start 0ase Sets the receiver as a 0ase transmitting the selected coordinates.
The icon "ore...
opens a pop'up menu of the following options.
M!lti 6a'e
The "ulti 0ase dialog sets the multi base mode for RT6 survey. 0ase Station I. The identifying number of the base, which is sent as part of the !"R: messages. $ach base in a networ5 must have a uniOue I.. Transmit .elay Signal transmission delay from the current base. This parameter is set to ensure that the radio signals from multiple bases do not overlap. $ach base should be set at least (/8 milliseconds apart from any other. ;At least /88 milliseconds for data transfer rates less than 7188 bps.< 2se "ulti 0ase $nables multi base mode for surveying.
Start 6a'e p p"!p /en!

The pop'up menu can contain the following options= Status !onfig Radio depends on the configuration for the survey "ulti 0ase
P/N 7010-0492
101111
)ettin. *# GP) )*&$e,
Static Occ!pati n
The Static *ccupation dialog allows the configuration of the receiver for a Post'Processed static occupation of the survey mar5er. Point $nter the name of the point where the static receiver is located. It can be chosen from the map or the list of the @ob points, or can be entered manually. !ode The code you want assigned to the point. It will be included in the raw #PS data file. Ant )t The measured antenna height and type ;vertical or slant< of measurement. .uration The length of time you want the receiver to log data to the raw #PS data file. Start *cc This button starts the logging of epochs into the raw #PS data file.
Localization
The 9ocali?ation is used for transformation of the coordinates between a local ;ground< system and other ;B#S4+< system, in which the @ob points are measured. The 9ocali?ation dialog contains a list of points used for locali?ation. These are called control points. Their coordinates are 5nown in both systems= local ;F6nown PointF< and @ob coordinate system ;F"easured PointF<. $ach point has a level of reliability specified
101212
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
;o'ali=ation
with the values of the residuals along the hori?ontal and the vertical a es and the !ontrol parameters, that shows the status of the point. Type Allows you to select the type of 9ocali?ation ;by the @ob coordinate system<. The B#S4+ selection is always available. .atum or #rid selections are available only if you selected a specific coordinate system in the !oordinate System dialog before visiting the 9ocali?ation dialog. *n 9ocali?ation dialog it is possible to change the 9ocali?ation type after control points were added. Add *pens the 9ocali?ation Point dialog for adding control points. $dit *pens the 9ocali?ation Point dialog to change the control point added. Remove Removes the highlighted points. .etails *pens the 9ocali?ation Results dialog. Settings *pens the Survey parameters dialog. Related tas5s= d 0asic !oncept of 9ocali?ation d 9ocali?ation with Stereographic Pro@ection on B#S4+ d 9ocali?ation with Stereographic Pro@ection on any .atum d 9ocali?ation with any Predefined or !reated Pro@ection d *ne'point 9ocali?ation d Two'point 9ocali?ation d Three'point 9ocali?ation d Performing 9ocali?ation d Importing 9ocali?ation .ata to *ther ,ob
P/N 7010-0492
101313
)ettin. *# GP) )*&$e,
Add 4 caliBati n P int

The Add 9ocali?ation Point dialog contains the coordinates of the control point added to locali?ation. 6nown Point The 6nown Point field contains the coordinates of the point in the local ;ground< coordinate system. Point= sets the name of the control point. Iou can enter a new point, select a point from the map or from the list. (se 0ori1ontal= specifies that a point should be used for the hori?ontal locali?ation. (se 7ertical= set if the point should be used for the vertical locali?ation. "easured Point The "easured Point field contains the coordinates of the control point in the coordinate system that is set for the current @ob. Bhen computing locali?ation parameters these coordinates will be transformed to the local system. The type of transformation can be selected in 9ocali?ation dialog. Point= Sets the name of the control point. Iou can enter a new point, select a point from the map or from the list. Start )eas= Sets the control point to the current location. The $poch !ount field shows the number of the accepted epochs. The parameters of the logging are set through the Survey Parameters dialog. If a point with the same name already e ists, the application will open the Point !hec5 notification dialog. Iou can overwrite, rename, or store the point as a chec5 point. *6= Saves the point and returns to the 9ocali?ation dialog with a newly added point.
4 caliBati n 1e'!lt'
The 9ocali?ation Results dialog contains the calculated parameters of the locali?ation= the global coordinates ;9at8, 9on8, h8<, the corresponding local coordinates ;N8, $8, $lev8<, the scale parameter
101414
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
)i+*lato&
;Scale<, the rotation parameter ;A?< and the plane slope angles corresponding to north and east directions.
Si/!lat r
Allows you to setup the initial B#S4+ position for #PS simulation. If simulation moving speed is not ?ero, the current position starts to drift immediately. The current position is remembered between TopS2RC runs. "oving speed and direction can be changed in the main map or in the Topo dialog using arrows.
3n =n P int InitialiBati n
The 6nown Point Initiali?ation is used to initiali?e the receiver using the 5nown coordinates for the Rover station. It is optionally used with single freOuency receivers and for Ouality control on dual freOuency receivers. 0y default, this option is absent in the menu. To show it,
from the )ome menu, clic5 Point
and then
. "ore...
$nter the name of the point where the 0ase receiver is located. It can be chosen from the map or the list of the @ob points, or can be entered manually. !oordinates The coordinates of the rover position in the selected coordinate system. Ant )t
P/N 7010-0492
101010
)ettin. *# GP) )*&$e,
The measured antenna height and type ;vertical or slant< of measurement. Initiali?e Initiali?ed the receiver as a rover with the specified coordinates of 6PI Position.
3PI P 'iti n
The Position page displays= d The total number of the available satellites. The loc5 icon signifies the number of the satellites trac5ed, the star icon shows the number of satellites used in position determination. d The current 2T! time. d The Residuals. d The P.*P valueM it is a factor depending solely on satellite geometry describing how the uncertainty in the coordinates will depend on the measurement errors. P.*P is proportional to the estimated position uncertainty. d ) and C stand for )R"S and CR"S, the R"S values of the hori?ontal and vertical coordinates, respectively. d 6PR Status= If it is Initiali?ing or Initiali?ed.
//GPS InitialiBati n
The Init mm#PS: dialog contains information about the calibration of the laser transmitter and initiali?ation of the sensor. Transmitter .ata Transmitter Position Sensor
101111
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
++GP) (nitiali=ation
The icon in the upper'left corner of the dialog displays a pop' up menu of the following items= d Field Calibration= *pens the !alibration dialog to set the transmitter to calibrate ;i.e. to fi errors in incline in the selfleveling mechanism of the transmitter<. d 6nown #oint &!!set= *pens the 6nown Point *ffset dialog.
Tran'/itter P 'iti n
The Trans Pos tab allows you to set up the transmitterYs height and location at the @obsite. The 9ist contains the following items= Name= The name of the transmitter. 8D= The channel of the transmitter. #oint= The point over which the transmitter is setup. Resect *pens the Resect dialog to perform resection for an un5nown transmitter location. $dit *pens the 6nown Point dialog to select the point over which the transmitter is setup. .elete Removes the transmitter from the list. The bitmap in the upper'left corner of the dialog displays a floating menu of the following items= Field Calibration= *pens the !alibration dialog to set the transmitter to calibrate ;i.e. to fi errors in incline in the self'leveling mechanism of the transmitter<. 6nown #oint &!!set= *pens the 6nown Point *ffset dialog.
P/N 7010-0492
101717
)ettin. *# GP) )*&$e,
Tran'/itter P 'iti n
The Trans Pos tab allows you to set up the transmitterYs height and location at the @obsite. The 9ist contains the following items= Name= The name of the transmitter. 8D= The channel of the transmitter. #oint= The point over which the transmitter is setup. Resect *pens the Resect dialog to perform resection for an un5nown transmitter location. $dit *pens the 6nown Point dialog to select the point over which the transmitter is setup. .elete Removes the transmitter from the list.
Sen' r
The Sensor tab uploads transmitter calibration information to the sensor and sets up the sensor for receiving the transmitterYs laser beam. Receiver Port The receiver port that connects the receiver and sensor. Transmitter I. The transmitterYs channel. The ANI selection will allow the sensor to independently select the transmitter with the smallest error rate. Sensor #ain Sets the sensitivity of the sensor to the transmitterYs laser beam. Init Time Improvement !hec5 this bo to improve the RT6 fi time for the receiver. Init Sensor
101515
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Starts initiali?ation process.
1e'ect //Gp'> 1e'ect

The Resect tab is used to perform the resection calculation from the rover point to the point over which the transmitter is set. The upper'right corner of the dialog displays information about the current state of measurement= The mm#PS icon displays the sensor that receives the transmitterYs beam. The Ouality of the radio lin5. The type of the position calculation method. The R"S errors for hori?ontal and vertical coordinates, respectively. The number of the satellites trac5ed and used in position calculation, respectively. "eas The number of measurement. 6nown Point $nable this when occupying a 5nown point, and select a point to occupy using the map and list buttons. )t The antennaYs height and method of height measurement. Start Starts the measurement process. After pressing, the button changes the name to Stop, and the counter of the epochs collected appears. 9ogging .isplays the number of #PS epochs used in the resection calculation during the measurement.
1e'ect //Gp'> Sen' r

The Resect dialog is used to measure an un5nown transmitter location using the rover and three or more points. The Sensor tab is similar to
P/N 7010-0492
101919
)ettin. *# GP) )*&$e,
the Sensor tab on the Init mm#PS: dialog and used to set up the sensor. Receiver Port Sets the receiver port that connects the receiver and sensor. Transmitter I. .isplays the channel of the transmitter. Sensor #ain Sets the sensitivity of the sensor to the transmitterYs laser beam. Init Sensor Starts the initiali?ation of the sensor. Init Time Improvement Select to improve the RT6 fi time for the receiver. 6nown Trans )or? Pos If selected, then after pressing the Init Sensor button, the 6nown Point dialog displays. Select the point over which the transmitter is setup.
2ata
The .ata tab is used to view the results of resection measurements. .ata will display only after three or more points have been measured. Re'"eas !lears all data and restarts the resection process. Accept *pens the Add Point dialog to view the point information for the transmitter.
Tran'/itter
The Transmitter dialog sets the transmitter parameters. Name
102020
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
The name of the transmitter. !om Port The communication port of the controller used to connect to the transmitter. I. The channel of the transmitter. !alibration .ata The status of calibration data. !lear .ata !lear the I. and !alibration .ata fields. #et .ata Retrieves the transmitterYs data.
Field Cali&rati n
The %ield !alibration dialog selects the transmitter for field calibration. Transmitter Name The name of the transmitter to calibrate.
0pdate Cali&rati n 2ata

The 2pdate !alibration .ata dialog will be displayed after performing %ield !alibration if it is determined that the transmitter leveling offsets need to be ad@usted. !om Port The communication port of the controller used to connect to the transmitter. 2pdate .ata Sends the offset info to the transmitter.
P/N 7010-0492
102121
)ettin. *# GP) )*&$e,
3n =n P int
The 6nown Point dialog is used to select the 5nown point over which the transmitter is setup and enter the transmitter height. Point The point the transmitter is installed over. It can be selected using the map or list buttons. Transmitter Name .isplays the name of the transmitter. I. .isplays the transmitterYs channel. )t Sets the height of the transmitter from the ground to the mar5 on the transmitterYs side and the method of height meaurement in the specified units. (m %i ed Tripod This bo can be chec5ed if using a ( meter fi ed tripod.
3n =n P int Off'et
The 6nown Point *ffset is used to compute the height offset between the rover and a currently occupied 5nown point. This can be used as an ad@ustment for the transmitter height. Transmitter Name .isplays the name of the transmitter. Point The point to be occupied. It can be selected using the map or list buttons. )eight *ffset .isplays the difference in height between the 5nown measurement and the current rover measurement.
102222
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
$poch !ount .isplays the number of #PS epochs used in the measurement. Start Starts the measurement process. After pressing, the button changes it name on Stop, and the counter of the epochs collected appears.
//GPS> Opti n'

The mm#PS: *ptions dialog allows modification of various mm#PS: functions. The current status of the receiverYs mm#PS: engine is displayed as *N, *%% or .ISA09$.. Iou can change the status by using the combo bo to turn the mm#PS: engine *N or *%%. 2se weighted height computations The mm#PS: height can be computed using weights for the laser and #PS data. Bhen this bo is chec5ed, a greater weight is applied to the laser measurement when the rover is closer to the transmitter or to the #PS measurement when the rover is further away. )eight .ifference 9imit Set a limit for the difference between #PS and mm#PS: height measurements. The mm#PS: icon will change if the difference is over this limit.
Settin$'
Ele+ation mas3 sets the parameter re@ecting low'elevation satellites while positioning. Canopy En+ironment chec5 bo instructs the RT6 engine to use less rigid thresholds when filtering out measurement outliers. This mode is recommended when wor5ing under a tree canopy or in other cases of high multipath. 2ase )a3e at -o+er allows you to designate 0ase "a5e ;I#S !lass< used by the Rover receiver to account for #9*NASS biases. This also
P/N 7010-0492
102323
)ettin. *# GP) )*&$e,
allows you to override 0ase "a5e automatically detected by the Rover receiver if this information is transmitted by the 0ase.
NOTICE
NOTICE
If the receiver is connected, the settin$s are applied upon closin$ the dialo$.
Se''i n'
The Sessions dialog allows you to configure and edit automatic surveys and install them into TPS receivers. The receivers can each be given a descriptive name and added to a list, easing the tas5 of controlling multiple'receiver surveys. The YAY 0uttons The left hand button can be used to remove a Session survey configuration from the Sessions list. The right hand button can be used to remove a receiver from the Receiver list. The Y'QY 0utton 2se this button to add a Session survey configuration to a receiver in the Receivers list. The YAddY 0uttons The left hand button opens the Session Setup dialog in which you enter or edit the Session survey configurations. The right hand button allows the addition of a new receiver to the Receivers list.
Se''i n'
The Sessions dialog is accessed through the e port menu item. It allows you to import automatic surveys from TPS receivers into the controller. Refresh This button refreshes the active sessions list from the current receiver. 102424
)essions
$ port This button sends the selected session to the receiver.
Se''i n Set!p
Session setup allows you to program a session which can then be loaded into the receiver to automatically start logging data at a specific date and time, and whether the antenna is static or roving. Site Name The name of the site where the receiver will be placed for the survey. Type Type of survey, either static or 5inematic. Start Time The day of wee5 and the local time that the receiver will start the survey. $nd Time The day of wee5 and the local time that the receiver will end the survey. Interval The time between sucessive epochs logged to the raw data file. "in SCs The minimum number of SCs to use when logging an epoch. $pochs containing fewer satellites will not be logged to the raw data file. Ant )t The measured antenna height and type ;vertical or slant< of measurement.
)ettin. *# GP) )*&$e,
Notes2
C-a#te& 11
GP) )*&$e,
S!r8e; f lder
Survey types depend upon the current @ob configuration.
S!r8e; GPS
Clic9 an ic n t 'tart the de'ired '!r8e;:
To po !onducts a survey with #PS static points and determine inaccessible points by setting offsets from measured points= *ffset 9ine, A?imuth D *ffset and *ffset 9aser. %ind out more on *ffsets. Auto Topo !onducts a survey with #PS dynamic points. A'Section Performs a survey of a road cross'section. %ind Station Identifies the station by the distance, computed to the station, and the offset from the road. Tape .imentions !alculates the periphery of structures using tape measurements, relative to the two 5nown points that belong to one side of the structure.
P/N 7010-0492
11-1
GP) )*&$e,
T p
The Topo dialog enables you to initiate a static survey. The Topo page contains the initial data for the survey and displays the progress of the survey. In the upper right corner of the dialog the information about the receiver operation is located. It duplicates the information on the Status dialog. Point .isplays the name of the point to be logged. !ode .isplays the code for the point. Pressing the F...F button in the !ode field displays the menu= Strin%= switches on the String field on the Topo tab. String is a specifying parameter for a code that allows you to group the ob@ects with one code according to some specified attribute. %or e ample, the code FPoleF also has the F,onesYF string. Processing the points, you will be able to select only the poles of ,onesY and will not ta5e into consideration all the other poles. Multiple Codes= opens the "ultiple !ode Strings dialog. Control Code= opens the !ontrol code dialog. Note= opens the Notes dialog. Ant )t The measured antenna height and type ;vertical or slant< of measurement. $poch count Shows the number of the epochs used in averaging the position. Start Starts the survey process. After pressing the button changes it name to Accept and a new button !ancel appears along with the count of the epochs achieved. The point is automatically saved, if it meets the criteria for 9ogging the point as specified in Settings. Start 9og ;present for the survey modes that include PP< Starts Raw data logging into the receiver. Settings
A*to To#o
*pens the Survey Parameters dialog.
2ata
The Topo'.ata page contains the information of the base and the last point that has been logged since this dialog was opened.
Map
The "ap tab shows the stored points graphically. All the survey process can be done through this page as well. It contains the information similar to the To po dialog.
A!t
T p
The Auto Topo dialog enables you to initiate a dynamic survey. The Auto Topo page contains the initial data for the survey and displays the progress of the survey. In the upper right corner of the dialog the information about the receiver operation is located. Point .isplays the name of the point to be logged. !ode .isplays the code for the point. Pressing the F...F button in the !ode field displays the menu= Strin%= switches on the String field on the Topo tab. ;Also the FDF sign appears indicating string< String is a specifying parameter for a code that allows you to group the ob@ects with one code according to some specified attribute. %or e ample, the code FPoleF also has the F,onesYF string. Processing the points, you will be able to select only the poles of ,onesY and will not ta5e into consideration all the other poles. Multiple Codes= opens the "ultiple !ode Strings dialog. Control Code= opens the !ontrol code dialog. Note= opens the Notes dialog. Ant )t
GP) )*&$e,
The measured antenna height and type ;vertical or slant< of measurement. 9og Now Stores the current position of the receiver antenna. Pause Interrupts the survey. After pressing this button, the button changes its name to Resume. Start Starts the survey process. After pressing this button, the button changes the name to Stop and the Pause button becomes available. Start 9og ;PP .#PS and PP 6inematic modes< Starts Raw data logging into the receiver. Settings *pens the Survey Parameters dialog.
1a= 2ata
9ists all the coordinates>measurement information of the selected raw data record.
1a= Gp'>
All the raw data collected is displayed in a list on this dialog. Bhen a line is selected, the column titles reflect the data in that line. .ouble clic5 on a line to see the .ata in a separate dialog. The !oordinates of the 0ase are displayed and the vectors to the base from the rover of the collected points. The vectors are only displayed for the points collected with fi ed solutions. %irst "oves the cursor to the first observation in the raw data. 9ast "oves the cursor to the last observation in the raw data. Add Notes
C&oss )e'tion
.isplays a dialog to enter additional notes for an observed point. %ind by Point %inds a point by its name or a part of the name. %ind by !ode %inds a point by its code. %ind Ne t %inds the ne t point in the list that satisfies the same conditions as the previous %ind.
Gp' Off'et'
The *ffsets tab allows you to set the offset point for the measurement. 9ine *pens the 9ine dialog to define a point set by the offset from a line. A? .is )t *pens the A?imuth'.istance')eight dialog to define a point set by the offset from a point. 9aser Present if 9aser has been selected in the !onfiguration. *pens the 9aser dialog for measurement to define a point.
Cr '' Secti n
The !ross'Section tas5 allows the user to perform the survey of the cross section. To start wor5ing, select the Survey'QA'Section menu. The !ross Section dialog contains the settings of the station, where the cross section survey is to be performed, if a Road is selected. -oa& $nter the name of the Road manually or select the road from the list. Cl Co&e=
GP) )*&$e,
$nter the code and attributes of the center line points. Insert manually, or select one from the drop'down list. Station>Chainage Sets the station where the cross section is surveyed. This field is shown only if the road is set. Inter+al The increment of distance towards the ne t station. This field is shown only if the road is set.
Cr '' Secti n
This dialog appears only if a Road has not been selected for the cross section. Station>Chainage $nter the Station>!hainage for the recorded cross section.
Find Stati n
The "easurement tab of the %ind Station dialog is used for the identification of the station by computing the distance from the beginning of the road to the pro@ection of the station to the road, and the offset of the station from the center line of the road. Road Type the name for the road or select it from the list. Point The name of the point to %ind Station for or to store after ta5ing a measurement. !ode The code and attributes of the Point. !ode can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. Ant )t
Ta#e 9i+ension
$nter the height of the antenna reference point ;ARP< above the mar5. Also the measurement type for the height needs to be specified= slant or vertical. Pt Sta !omputes the offsets of the selected point. !urr Sta !omputes and displays the offsets to the current point. Start Starts the survey process. After pressing the button, the name changes to Accept and a new button !ancel appears along with the count of the epochs achieved. The point is automatically saved, if it meets the criteria for 9ogging the point as specified in Settings.
Tape 2i/en'i n
The Tape .im tab contains the settings for performing the survey. Point The name of the ne t point in the survey. !ode The code and attributes of the Point. !ode can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. .ist 9eft>.ist Right Toggles between .ist 9eft and .ist Right values. These set the direction of the ne t movement, relative to the previous direction. The field below sets the distance to move. Accept Applies the taped distance to the perimeter line. %inish *pens the floating menu of two items= Close #oly%on" connects the first and the last two points with a line.
GP) )*&$e,
Calc Closure" calculates the difference between the last and the first points.
1ef 4ine
The Tape .imension dialog allows you to calculate the periphery of structures, such as buildings, that have features perpendicular to each other. This is done using tape measurements, relative to the two 5nown points that belong to one side of the structure ;wall of the building<, forming the reference line. The Ref 9ine tab contains information about the two points comprising the reference line. Start Pt !ontains the properties of the starting point= the name ;can be entered manually, or chosen from the map or list< and code. Also, the point can be measured by pressing the "eas button. $nd Pt !ontains the properties of the ending point= the name ;can be entered manually, or chosen from the map or list< and code. Also the point can be measured by pressing the "eas button.
C"Secti n
The A'Sect survey is performed from one side of the road to another in a plane perpendicular to the center line. If the road has not been set, you should define the plane. The points are surveyed similar to the *bservations from the Topo .ialog. Point .isplays the name of the point to be logged. !ode $nter the !ode and Arributes for the Point the first time a line is recorded. This will automatically update from the ne t line. Ant )t
>-)e'tion
The measured antenna height and type ;vertical or slant< of measurement. $poch count Shows the number of the epochs used in averaging the position. Start Starts the survey process. Pressing the button changes the name to Accept and a new button !ancel appears along with the count of the epochs achieved. The point is automatically saved if it meets the criteria for 9ogging the point as specified in Settings. Along !9>*ffset The offset values for the current position get displayed if a Road has been selected.
2ata
The A'Sect .ata page contains the information of the base and the last point that has been logged since this dialog was opened. If an alignment has been defined the offset values get displayed as well.
Map
The "ap tab shows the stored points graphically. All the survey process can be done through this page as well.
PT4 M de
The Point'To'9ine mode ;PT9< is a method of interpretation of the point coordinates. The coordinates are defined through the two reference points. The line trace through these points is set as one a is and its perpendicular as another. Start Ref Point, $nd Ref Point The names of the reference points. Select these points from the map or select from the list of points. PT9 "ode *n $nables the PT9 mode if chec5ed.
GP) )*&$e,
4a'er Set!p
*cc Point The occupation point can be selected by either entering the name, by selecting from the map or the list, or can be obtained from the 0S dialog ;when we have an encoder<. 0S A?imuth>0S Point Iou can enter the 0S A?imuth value, select the 0S point, or obtain it from the 0S dialog ;when we have an encoder<. 9aser )I )eight of the device above the *cc Point. Point Name of the Point being measured. !ode !ode of the point being measured. 0S "eas;when we have encoder< Ta5es you to the 9aser 0S "eas dialog. There is a message window which guides you on what to do and displays the measurement values.
11-10
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
C-a#te& 12
O#ti'al )*&$e, )et*#

Set!p Optical ?T tal Stati n@ f lder
9ocali?ation !alculates locali?ation parameters of the mathematical coordinate transformation between an original coordinate system, in which the @ob points are measured or given, and a local coordinate system, in which control points are 5nown. %ind out more... 0ac5sight Sets up a Total Station survey with a reference direction. Resection !omputes the coordinates of an occupation point, where the instrument is set up, using measurements to two ;or more< points with 5nown coordinates. 0enchmar5 !omputes the elevation of an occupation point, where the instrument is set up, using measurements to two ;or more< points with 5nown elevations. Remote !trl Transmits commands from the controller to the motori?ed total station.
6S S!r8e;
The 0ac5sight Survey dialog contains the parameters of the 0ac5sight station. The 0S Setup page contains following parameters= *cc. Point The name of the point where the total station is located. The *cc. Point floating menu allows access to the= -esection= opens the Resection dialog that allows you to determine the occupation point coordinates by solving the resection tas5, using the 5nown point coordinates. Elevation= opens the $levation dialog. )I Set the height of the instrument above the mar5. )R Set the height of the target above the mar5. 0S Point ;0S A?imuth< Set the bac5sight point location or the direction to it. 0S !ircle .isplays the hori?ontal circle reading corresponding to the bac5sight point. The bitmap ne t to the 0S !ircle field brings up the floating menu that recommends for you to set the 0S !ircle value to ?ero or a?imuth, or to change the value by :>' 78 or &48 degrees. "easure distance to 0S Set if the distance to bac5sight point should be measured. %i ed )R at 0S Set if the height of the bac5sight point is fi ed for the whole set of measurements. This is useful when one target is mounted at the 0S for the duration of an occupation and another is used for the sideshots. !hec5 0S *pens the !hec5 0ac5sight dialog for the bac5sight point chec5ing.
12-2
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
<) )*&$e,
)! Set Sets the hori?ontal circle as defined in the 0S !ircle field. "eas 0S "easures the 0ac5sight point. Settings *pens the "ode dialog. The bitmap on the upper'left corner brings up the following pop'up menu list= Edit #oints= opens the Points list. Edit -aw= opens the Raw TS dialog. 8nverse= opens the Inverse !*#* dialog. 8ntersection= opens the Intersection !*#* dialog. The ,ata page displays the available values of the bac5sight point parameters= 9ocal coordinates ;east, north and height<, Angle right A?imuth )A ;)ori?ontal Angle< CA ;Certical Angle< S. ;Slope .istance< There are two fields in the top of the page where one can see the height of the instrument and the a?imuth.
Chec9 6ac9'i$ht
The !hec5 0ac5sight dialog contains information about the bac5sight point errors. There are two fields in the top of the page where one can see the height of the instrument and the a?imuth. !hec5 distance to 0S Set if it is necessary to chec5 the distance to the bac5sight point along with the angle measurement ;when pressing the !hec5 button<. !hec5 !hec5s the errors in angle and distance measurements and displays them on the dialog. )! Set
P/N 7010-0492
12-3
Sets the hori?ontal circle to the selected value.
1e/ te C ntr l
%rom the Remote !ontrol dialog, you can control the total station through the radio. It shows the current values of the total station measurements and provides a set of tools for the control. The button with arrows, switches the 5eyboard control on and off and shows the current status of the switch. Nloc5 Sends the FNuic5loc5F or FTurn AroundF command which will cause the Total Station to search for the R!'(. R!'( is the Remote !ontrol System ( for optical communications. %or instructions on how to operate the R!'( device, consult the instruction manual for R!'(. Search "a5e the instrument search for the prism. 9oc5 9oc5s onto the prism or trac5s it. Turn *pens the Rotate dialog which allows the Total station to turn to various angles or points. Stop "a5es the total station stop trac5ing the prism and go into a FStandbyF mode. The .ata Indicator above the Nloc5 button shows the current state of the Total Station. There are four types= no data, Ouerying status, turning, and receiving data. All the observations can be done in the remote mode as well if the instrument chosen is robotic.
1 & tic Arr ='

The buttons allow turning the total station on devices without arrow 5eys. 12-4
7ese'tion
$ach button corresponds to a direction to turn, plus the button in the center can be used to stop turning.
1e'ecti n
The method of resection allows you to define the hori?ontal coordinates for the occupation point. Two points with distance measurements are the minimum reOuired to determine the occupation coordinates and the bac5sight constant. Bith angle'only measurements, - points are reOuired. Additional points can also be measured, in which case a least'sOuared weighing is used. Point The 5nown point name. !ode The 5nown point code. The code can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. )R The height of the rod. "eas Ta5es the sideshot to the point.
1e'ecti n Opti n'

The resection options dialog controls the input parameters and options for the implementation of the least sOuares solution. Resection Type Bhether you are performing a (. or -. resection. Resection "ethod Bhen performing a -. resection, this determines whether the least sOuares solution is split into hori?ontal and vertical solutions or performed as a single -. solution. 2se .efault "easurement Accuracy
P/N 7010-0492
12-0
Sets the system default values for measurement accuracy. .istance $rror in the distance measurement. PP" Part per million error in the distance measurement. )or? Angle $rror in the hori?ontal angle measurement. Cert Angle $rror in the vertical angle measurement.
12-1
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
C-a#te& 13
O#ti'al )*&$e,
S!r8e; Optical ?T tal Stati n@
Clic9 an ic n t 'tart the de'ired '!r8e;:
To po !onducts a survey with sideshot points, and determine inaccessible points by setting *ffsets from measured points. %ind out more on *ffsets. Auto Topo !ollects points by Time and .istance only with Robotic instruments. A'Section *btains the coordinates of points that lie on a plane perpendicular to a road center line. This type of survey is typically performed by moving from one side of a road to the other in the cross'sectional plane, and then crossing bac5 in the opposite direction at a different location along the road. %ind Station Identifies the station by the distance, computed to the station, and the offset from the road. Tape .imentions !alculates the periphery of structures using tape measurements, relative to the two 5nown points that belong to one side of the structure. "issing 9ine $mulates the total station measurement from one point to another and stores the result to the Raw .ata database.
P/N 7010-0492
13-1
O#ti'al )*&$e,
Scanning !ollects points by scanning ;with or without images< with Robotic and motori?ed reflectorless instruments. "onitor "easures one or more prisms repeatedly and uses the measurements to detect changes in the position of the prisms. The measurements are recorded into the raw data file.
T p
S!r8e;
Side'h t"2irect
The Sideshot'.ir dialog contains the initial data for the performing single sideshots and displays the information during survey. The measurement to a single point is ta5en using the .irect position of the Total Station. Point Sets the current point name. .uring the survey the numerical part of the name changes automatically by one. !ode Sets the !ode for the current point. This can be entered manually or chosen from the dropdown list. The bitmap ne t to the Attributes 9ist bitmap brings up the following list= String= displays a control to enter the string for the point. )ultiple Co&e= opens the "ultiple !ode Strings dialog. Control Co&e= opens the !ontrols dialog. "ote= opens the Notes dialog. PT9 )o&e= opens the PT9 "ode dialog. )R Sets the height of the target above the mar5 ;rod height<.
Offsets
0S Setup *pens the 0ac5sight Survey dialog for setting the bac5sight point. "eas Ta5es a measurement and logs the point.
Side'h t"2irectA1e8er'e
The measurement to a single point is ta5en using the .irect Position and the Reverse Position of the Total Station ;i.e., Plunge ' %lip and Rotate the Total station by &48 degrees to get the reverse measurement<. *ne set consists of one direct and one reverse measurement. These measurements are used to eliminate the Certical circle centering errors. This dialog behaves similar to the Sideshot'.irect dialog e cept that one measurement constitutes a set of readings rather than a single one.
An$Adi't Set'"2irA1e8
In this method for the measurement to a single point, the instrument will use the specified Angle seOuence to perform repeated measurements. The seOuence of four measurements constitutes one set. *ne measurement is the bac5sight in .irect phase or the %oresight in Reverse phase in two positions of the Total Station. These measurements are used to eliminate centering errors in the hori?ontal and vertical circles. This dialog behaves similar to the Sideshot'.irect dialog e cept that one measurement constitutes a set of readings rather than a single one.
Off'et'
The *ffsets page contains a set of tools for defining the offsets. )? Angle
O#ti'al )*&$e,
.efines a point using the hori?ontal angle from one point and the distance to another. )?'Ct Angle .efines a point using the hori?ontal and vertical angles. .ist. *ffset .efines a point giving you the ability to add or subtract distances, hori?ontally and vertically. ( 9ine ISection .etermines a point by the intersection of the two lines. $ach line is defined by two points or two measurements. 9ine D !orner .etermines a point on the corner using one line defined by two points and a hori?ontal angle measurement. 9ine D *ffset .etermines a point that is in a distance from a line defined by two points. Plane D !orner .etermines a point ;!orner< by a plane defined by three points and hori?ontal and vertical angle measurements.
Stati n and Off'et

The Station and *ffset dialog allows the bac5sight or occupation point to be determined by the station, offset and elevation in relation to a road. Road The referenced alignment can be a road or hori?ontal alignment. Station $nter the station along the road where this point should occur. *ffset $nter the offset from the road where this point should occur.
13-4
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Offsets
$levation $nter the elevation of the point.
HA Off'et
The Sideshot page of the )ori?ontal Angle *ffset dialog contains data for definition of a point using the hori?ontal angle from one point and the distance to another. Point Name for the offset point to be stored. !ode !ode for the offset point to be stored. !an be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. )R Sets the target height above the mar5 ;rod height<. Settings *pens the "ode dialog. Side and !enter Iou should measure to !enter and obtain the vertical angle and hori?ontal angle measurements. A Side measurement provides CA, )A, and distance measurements. Bith these two sets of measurements, the computation can be made for point at center of a tree.
HBADt An$le Off'et

The Survey *ffsets dialog in the )?'Ct Angle mode contains data for definition of a point using the hori?ontal and vertical angles and a distance. Point Name for the offset point to be stored. !ode
P/N 7010-0492
13-0
O#ti'al )*&$e,
!ode for the offset point to be stored. This can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. )R Sets the target height. .istance "easures the slope distance to target. )A>CA !ombines the hori?ontal angle and vertical angle measurements with distance logged in .istance step to determine the point location.
2i'tance Off'et
The .istance *ffset dialog contains data for the definition of a point giving the ability to add or subtract distances, hori?ontally and vertically. Point Name for the offset point to be stored. !ode !ode for the offset point to be stored. This can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. )R Sets the target height above the mar5 ;rod height<. The .istance *ffsets field contains the three parameters of the offset= Downsets the height of the point relatively to the current position. Towardsets the distance between the current point and the pro@ection of the offset point on the line of sight. -i%.tsets the distance between the offset point and its pro@ection, ta5ing into consideration its location relative to the line of sight. "eas Performs the measurement.
13-1
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Offsets
Hidden P int
The "easurement tab of the )idden Point dialog allows you to define a point on the ground surface with a slanted rod touching the ground point. The rod has two targets. Point Name for the offset point to be stored. !ode !ode for the offset point to be stored. This can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. )R Sets the target height above the mar5 ;rod height<. Rod Pt& "easures the first target on the rod. Rod Pt( "easures the second target on the rod.
T=
4ine Inter'ecti n
The Intersection dialog contains data for determination of a point by the intersection of the two lines. $ach line is defined by two points or two measurements. Point Name for the offset point to be stored. !ode !ode for the offset point to be stored. This can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. )R Sets the target height above the mar5 ;rod height<. 9ine & Pt&
P/N 7010-0492
13-7
O#ti'al )*&$e,
*btain measurements to determine the first point defining the first line. 9ine & Pt( *btain measurements to determine the second point defining the first line. 9ine ( Pt & *btain measurements to determine the first point defining the second line. 9ine ( Pt ( *btain measurements to determine the second point defining the second line.
4ine and C rner

The 9ine and !orner dialog contains data for determination of a point on the corner using one line defined by two points. Point Name for the offset point to be stored. !ode !ode for the offset point to be stored. This can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. )R Sets the target height above the mar5 ;rod height<. 9ine Pt& *btains measurements to determine the first point defining a line. 9ine Pt *btains measurements to determine the first point defining a line. !orner *btains the hori?ontal angle to locate a point on the line at the corner.
13-5
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Offsets
4ine and Off'et

The 9ine and *ffset dialog contains data for the determination of a point distant from a line defined by two points. Point Name for the offset point to be stored. !ode !ode for the offset point to be stored. This can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. )R Sets the target height above the mar5 ;rod height<. The .istance *ffsets field contains the three parameters of the offset= Down= sets the height of the point relatively to the current position. Toward= sets the distance between the current point and the pro@ection of the offset point on the line of sight. -i%.t= sets the distance between the offset point and its pro@ection, ta5ing into consideration its location relative to the line of sight. 9ine Pt& *btains measurements to the first point on the line. 9ine Pt( *btains measurements to the second point on the line.
Plane and C rner

The Plane and !orner dialog helps you to determine a point ;!orner< by a plane defined by three points and an angle measurement. Point Name for the offset point to be stored. !ode !ode for the offset point to be stored. This can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. )R
P/N 7010-0492
13-9
O#ti'al )*&$e,
Sets the target height above the mar5 ;rod height<. Plane & *btains measurements to determine the first point in a plane. Plane ( *btains measurements to determine the second point in a plane. Plane *btains measurements to determine the third point in a plane. !orner *btain hori?ontal and vertical angle measurements to determine the point in a plane at the corner. Note= Three points defining the plane must not be colinear ;all on the same line<.
A!t
T p
This function is activated only with Robotic instruments and allow you to collect points by Time and .istance. To open the Auto Topo dialog, select Survey'QAuto Topo in the Robotic mode. Point .isplays the current point name. !ode .isplays the current point code. The code can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. Attributes and the notes etc can also be set for the point by selecting from the menu ne t to the code. )R The height of the rod ;target<. Start Starts the survey process. After pressing, the button changes the name to $nd. 9og Now 131010
Ele$ation @M*lti#leA
Immediately stores the current position. Stop "a5es the total station stop trac5ing the prism and go into FStandbyF mode. Turn *pens the Rotate dialog which allows the Total station to turn to various angles or points. 9oc5 9oc5 onto the prism or Ftrac5F it. Search "a5es the instrument search for the prism. Nloc5 Sends the FNuic5loc5F or FTurn AroundF command which will cause the Total Station to search for the R!'(&.
Ele8ati n ?M!ltiple@
The method of elevation allows you to define the vertical coordinate using the coordinates of two ;or more< 5nown points. Point The 5nown point name. !ode The 5nown pointYs code. )R The height of the rod. "eas Ta5es the sideshot to the point.
P/N 7010-0492
131111
O#ti'al )*&$e,
M!ltiple 6ac9'i$ht
"ultiple bac5sight points allow you to perform more precise measurements. Point The 5nown point name. !ode The 5nown pointYs code. )R The height of the rod. "eas Ta5es the sideshot to the point.
M!lti Set Pa$e

The page contains the data collected during the measurements, grouped by sets ;one set for "ultiple mode contains two measurementsM one set of the Repeat mode contains four measurements<. The columns are= Set= the name of the set -es 0%= .ifference of each )A measurement within the set from the average of all the )AYs in the set -es 7%= .ifference of each CA measurement within the set from the average of all the CAYs in the set -es S,= .ifference of each S. measurement within the set from the average of all the S.Ys in the set 0%= )ori?ontal Angle measurement within the corresponding set 7%= Certical Angle measurement within the corresponding set S,= Slope .istance measurement within the corresponding set Remove .eletes all measurements from the set. Accept 131212
Fin )tation
Saves the measured point. Add 0rings you to the sideshot page to measure a new set of angles.
Find Stati n
The "easurement tab of the %ind Station dialog is used for the identification of the station by computing the distance from the beginning of the road to the pro@ection of the station to the road, and the offset of the station from the center line of the road. Road Type the name for the road, or select it from the list. Point The name of the point to %ind Station to store after ta5ing a measurement. !ode The code and attributes of the Point. The code can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. )R Sets the target height above the mar5 ;rod height<. 0S Setup *pens the 0ac5sight Survey dialog for setting the bac5sight point. The information displayed is the same as has been entered. Pt Stn !omputes the offsets of the selected point. !ur Stn Ta5es a shot to the point and computes and displays the offsets. "eas Ta5es a shot to the point, stores it and computes and displays the offsets in the Results tab.
P/N 7010-0492
131313
O#ti'al )*&$e,
Mi''in$ 4ine
The "issing 9ine dialog emulates the total station measurement from one point to another and stores the result to the Raw .ata database. The Start and $nd points can be entered manually, chosen from the map or from the list, or measured through the "eas button.
Tape 2i/en'i n
The Tape .im tab contains the settings for performing the survey. Point The name of the ne t point in the survey. !ode The code and attributes of the Point. The code can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. .ist 9eft>.ist Right Toggles between .ist 9eft and .ist Right values. These set the direction of the ne t movement, relative to the previous direction. The field below sets the distance to move. Accept Applies the taped distance to the perimeter line. %inish *pens the floating menu of two items= Close #oly%on" connects the first and the last two points with a line. Calc Closure" calculates the difference between the last and the first points.
1eference 4ine
The Tape .imension dialog allows you to calculate the periphery of structures, such as buildings, that have features perpendicular to each other. This is done using tape measurements, relative to the two
131414
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
>)e't-9i&e't/7e$e&se
5nown points that belong to one side of the structure ;wall of the building<, forming the reference line. The Ref 9ine tab contains information about the two points comprising the reference line. Start Pt !ontains the properties of the starting point= the name ;can be entered manually, or chosen from the map or list< and code. Also the point can be measured by pressing the "eas button. $nd Pt !ontains the properties of the ending point= the name ;can be entered manually, or chosen from the map or list< and code. Also the point can be measured by pressing the "eas button. ASect'.irect The A'Sect survey is performed from one side of the road to another in a plane perpendicular to the center line. If the road has not been set, you should define the plane. The points are surveyed similar to the *bservations from the Sideshot'.irect .ialog. !ur Sta Ta5es a shot of the point and computes and displays the offsets.
CSect"2irectA1e8er'e
The A'Sect survey is performed from one side of the road to another in a plane perpendicular to the center line. If the road has not been set, you should define the plane. The points are surveyed similar to the *bservations from the Sideshot'.irect>Reverse .ialog. !ur Sta Ta5es a shot of the point and computes and displays the offsets.
P/N 7010-0492
131010
O#ti'al )*&$e,
1e/ te 1 tate
The Rotate dialog contains the settings of the remote total station rotation. Rotation Angles Sets the values of the hori?ontal and vertical rotation angles. Turn Sends the data to the total station. Rotate to Point Select a point by typing its name, choosing from the map or the list, insert the )R value ;height of rod or target<, and press the Turn button. Plunge TS Press to plunge the instrument ;rotate the telescope and the body by &48 degrees<.
1e/ te Scannin$
This function is activated only with Robotic instruments and allows you to scan with Robotic Total Stations. To open the Scanning dialog, select Survey'QScanning in the Robotic mode. Point .isplays the name of the point. This can be chosen from the map or drop'down list. !ode .isplays the current point code. The code can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. Attributes and the notes etc can also be set for the point by selecting from the menu ne t to the code. *rientation Selects the type of plane ;)ori?ontal, Certical or Inclined< in which to scan.
131111
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
7e+ote )'annin.
Ne t *pens another Scanning dialog to set spacing and start scanning. 0ac5 *pens the first set of options for Remote Scanning. Spacing .isplays the distance between points.
Scannin$
In the Scanning dialog select a desired scan type= either Scan with Image or Scan w>o Image. If Scan w>o Image is selected, select the *rientation of the scan ' Certical, )ori?ontal or Incline. Select Scan The Select Scan dialog displays the settings for a scan session. Session Sets a Session name. Image Sets an Image file. Select a previous Image or browse for a new one ;Images are stored as ,P$# with the U.@pg file e tension.< !amera Sets the !amera information. If the Image e ists in the ,ob, the !amera information will be selected automaticallyM otherwise, select a previous !amera or browse for a new one ;!ameras are stored as a te t file with the U.cmr e tension.< Ciew *pens the Ciew Scan dialog. 0ac5 Returns to the previous dialog. Ne t
P/N 7010-0492
131717
O#ti'al )*&$e,
*nce all fields are filled, clic5ing the button opens the *rient dialog.
Die= Scan
The Ciew Scan dialog displays the image along with orientation and scanned points for completed scan sessions.
Orientati n
The *rient dialog associates a position on the image ; , y< with 5nown N, $, E coordinates. There are buttons to ?oom in, ?oom out, display the whole image, and to switche on>off the 5eyboard arrow 5eys that duplicate the arrows on the dialog. The bitmap ne t to the "eas button displays the menu of three items ;"eas, %rom "ap, %rom 9ist<. Tap on 5rientation Pt= first, tap on the image in a rough area of where the orientation point is located. The image will ?oom to this point and show a crosshair. The position of the crosshair can be ad@usted. Select or meas 5rient Pt= select a 5nown point from the Point 9ist or "ap, or measure a new point. !alc Bhen a minimum of four orientation points are established, clic5ing the button computes the image orientation and displays the results.
Orientati n 1e'!lt'
The *rient Res dialog displays the results of the image orientation. Accept !ontinues to the Scanning dialog to select areas for scanning. Remove Removes the selected point to ad@ust the orientation calculation. If four points still remain, the new results are displayed. If there are less 131515
7e+ote )'annin.
than four orientation points, then the *rientation Results dialog will close automatically to continue the orientation procedure.
Scan
To select one or more areas for scanning, ta5e either of the following two ways= &. .raw a rectangle by pressing the stylus on the dialog for the start point and dragging to the end point. Bhen the stylus is lifted, the area is set. (. .raw a polygon by pressing the stylus down at each verte . 9ines will be drawn connecting each verte to the previous one. Press the stylus near the first verte to close the area. Start Bhen the areas are set, pressing the button begins the scan. The Interval dialog opens so you can set the scanning parameters. !lear $rases all drawn areas. Settings *pens the "ode dialog. The main use is to set the instrument to FNon'PrismF mode which is reOuired for scanning and also to change the measurement mode ;%ine, !oarse<.
Scan
As the total station measures points within the predefined area, each point will be displayed on the image. Stop Immediately stops the scan.
Inter8al
The Interval dialog sets the starting point and hori?ontal and vertical intervals for scanning. Start Point
P/N 7010-0492
131919
O#ti'al )*&$e,
The starting point name. Interval $nters the scanning intervals either as Angle or number of points. )A )ori?ontal interval. CA Certical interval.
E'ti/ate Ti/e
0efore scanning begins, the $stimate Time dialog displays the scanning information including the total number of points to be scanned and an estimate of the time it will ta5e to complete the scan. If the estimated time is too long, clic5 !ancel and enter larger intervals. !lic5 *6 to begin scanning points.
M nit r
The "onitor function measures one or more prisms repeatedly and uses the measurements to detect changes in the position of the prisms. The measurements are recorded into the raw data file. *ptionally, the raw measurements or the computed points can be outputted to a file or communication port in either the %!'1 or #TS' 3 formats. The output format and destination is accessed from the "onitor *ptions dialog when configuring the total station. The "onitor dialog is used to control the monitor survey. Points The point name. Interval Interval listed as the !ycle Time. If a prism cannot be found after a period of &/ seconds, the total station will rotate to the ne t point in the seOuence.
132020
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Monito&
Auto If the Auto combobo is set to *N, the total station automatically rotates to the ne t point in the seOuence and records a measurement. If it is set to *%%, the total station rotates to the point, but allows you to verify or correct the centering to the prism prior to ta5ing a measurement. The monitor function will always complete the entire seOuence, even if the measurements ta5e longer than the cycle time. Start Initiates the seOuence of measurements, which repeats at the desired interval. Nloc5 Sends the YNuic5loc5Y or YTurn AroundY command that will cause the Total Station to search for the R!'(&. Search "a5e the instrument search for the prism. 9oc5 9oc5 onto the prism or Ytrac5Y it. Turn *pens the Rotate dialog that allows the Total station to turn to various angles or points. Stop "a5es the total station stop trac5ing the prism and go into YStandbyY mode.
The .ata Indicator above the Nloc5 button shows the current state of the robotic Total Station. There are four types= ' no data ' Ouerying status ' turning
M nit r Opti n'

9og To
P/N 7010-0492
132121
O#ti'al )*&$e,
Select from options None, %ile, or communication ports. If 9og To %ile or a communication port is chosen, select from the following= *utput Type Select whether to output -aw Data or Coordinates. *utput %ormat %or -aw Data, select whether to output %!'/, %!'1>#TS'3 or #TS'1 format. %or Coordinates, only ##A format is available. %ile Name If 9og To %ile is chosen, enter the name and location of the file to log to. !omm Settings If a serial !*" port is selected, enter the baud rate, parity, data and stop bits settings for the comm port. Store As !hec5 Point Bhen chec5ed, the measurements are stored as !hec5 Points to the original points in the monitor listM otherwise, they are stored as normal points.
M nit r P intli't
The "onitor Point 9ist dialog allows you to monitor points and create a point list to monitor. Point 9ist The pre'e isting points list. !an be chosen from the list or entered manually. 9ist of Points The list of currently selected points. The 2p and .own arrows to the left of 9ist of points allows you to move the highlighted point up or down in the order of the points. The arrows symbol switches on>off the 5eyboard arrow 5eys that 132222
Monito&
duplicate the arrows on the dialog. The A symbol deletes the highlighted point from the list. The symbol to the bottom right of the map can be used to toggle between the point list and the plot with the point list. )R The rod ;target< height. Ne t *pens the Survey dialog to monitor.
P/N 7010-0492
132323
O#ti'al )*&$e,
Notes2
132424
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
C-a#te& 14
;e$el )*&$e,
Crteate 4e8el 1!n
$nter information needed to create a 9evel Run. Name $nter a name for the 9evel Run. Note $nter a description for the 9evel Run.
4e8el 1!n
This dialog displays information regarding the .igital 9evel Run in progress. The items to be displayed and the order of items to be displayed can be selected by clic5ing .isplay Settings on the top left menu. Point Id Iou can select the point from the map, list or enter the name. !ode Iou can enter the code for the point to be measured. 0S !lic5 on 0S to ta5e a 0ac5sight shot. SS !lic5 on SS to ta5e a Sideshot measurement. %S !lic5 on %S to ta5e a %oresight measurement. Show Sum0S'Sum%S
P/N 7010-0492
14-1
;e$el )*&$e,
If this option is turned on ;Top 9eft "enu<, then the Sum0S'Sum%S will be displayed below the 9evel Run information.
Sh t'
#uides you through the sets needed to be ta5en for the measurement. "eas !lic5 "eas to ta5e a shot.
Sta9e SS
This dialog helps you to sta5e an SS point for the level run. *n the dialog is displayed the 0S Point ;already measured< and the SS point. Iou have the option to select a different SS point from the map or list. Also displayed are the rod ht and the hori?ontal distance for the 0S and SS points. The )eight of Instrument is also displayed. "eas Ta5es a measurement to the SS point and displays the elevation and cut>fill values. !lic5 *5 to save the measurement to the 9evel Run. !ancel Ouits the dialog without saving the value.
T=
Pe$ Te't
The Two peg test dialog guides you through a series of measurements to help determine any error in the line of sight through the level when the bubble is centered. !enter yourself between the two points to measure and ta5e a measurement to Peg&, then to Peg(. "ove the instrument to one of the pegs and then ta5e the shots again to Pegs & and (. The results are displayed. "eas !lic5 "eas to ta5e the measurement for the displayed prompted Peg.
T4o Pe. Test
9ocate Peg( "easures the hori?ontal distance to Peg( and compares it with the already ta5en measurement to Peg&. This measurement is not used in the error computations.
T=
Pe$ Te't 1e'!lt'
The results of the Two Peg testing appear on this dialog after all measurements are ta5en. The dialog displays all the shots ta5en and the computed error.
Settin$'
Select the columns to be displayed for a level run from this dialog. The order of the columns to be displayed can be changed by selecting the display column and clic5ing the up and down arrow.
;e$el )*&$e,
Notes2
14-4
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
C-a#te& 10
)ta6in.
Sta9e f lder
Points #PS Points *ptical ;Total Station< Points *ptical ;9evel< Sta5es design points with 5nown elevation. 9ines #PS 9ines *ptical ;Total Station< .etermines points along desired lines formed by design points. *ffsets Bith offsets, you can sta5e a 9ine, Intersection, - Pt !urve, !urve, and Spiral. Surface There are three types of Sta5e Surface= $levation, Road, and .T". $levation *nly for *ptical 9evel mode. Sta5es the elevation of a point. Point in .irection Sta5es a point using a 5nown point, the a?imuth, and the offsets from the a?imuth line.
P/N 7010-0492
10-0
)ta6in.
Point 9ist Sta5es points in a point list. Point 9ist *ptical ;9evel< Sta5es the listDP-7Ms design points to determine the elevation and compute a cut>fill value at every point in the list. !urve Sta5es points along a hori?ontal curve. Real'Time Road Sta5es points on a road in real time. Road Sta5es points on a road. Slope Sta5es points near a slope on the desired alignment. 9inewor5 Sta5es points on a linewor5 selected either by !odeString, from a linewor5 list, or from the map.
Sta9e P int
The Sta5eout Point dialog contains the initial data for the point sta5eout. .esign Point $nter the point to sta5eout. This can also be chosen from the map, the list, or a new point. !ode $nter the code for the design point. Antenna )t ;for #PS< 10-2
)ta6e 9; Point
Shows the default height of the antenna reference point ;ARP< above the mar5. Iou can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height in the Antenna Setup dialog. To do this, clic5 the Ant )t button, and select $dit. 0- ;for TS< $nter the reflector height. Sta5e Report Shows the name of the current sta5e report if it is set. Sta5e *pens the Sta5e dialog, assisting the sta5eout process.
he icon on the upper'left corner brings up the pop'up menu of additional options. "ore...
Sta9e p p"!p /en!

Status= opens the Status dialog Con$ig -a&io= opens the !onfigure Radio dialog 2S Setup= opens the 0S dialog Con$ig 9in3 ;only for the Robotic mode<= opens the !onfigure 9in5 dialog-emote Control ;only for the Robotic mode<= opens the Remote !ontrol dialog E&it Points= opens the Points dialog PT9 )o&e= if chec5ed, the design point for sta5eout is a PT9 point. The %rom ,ob list will display only the @ob points having PT9 coordinates for selection. In+erse= opens the Two'Point Inverse dialog 7ie' -eport= opens the current report Chats>Create "e'= opens the !hat dialog
Sta9e 24 P int
Select the 0S Point and .esign point to sta5e.
P/N 7010-0492
10-3
)ta6in.
0S Point Select the 0S point to be used for the bac5sight measurement. .esign Point Select the point to sta5e. 0S Ta5es the 0S measurement. Sta5eout .irects you to the Sta5e dialog to sta5e the design point.
Sta9e 4ine
The Sta5e 9ine dialog contains the initial data for the line sta5eout. Start Point Sets the starting point of the reference line. $nd Point>A?imuth Sets the direction of the reference line by either specifying another point, or the a?imuth. )t !omp The type of height computations to use for the sta5eout point. This can be one of the following= 0t o! Start #t ;height of starting point<= The sta5eout point will have the same height as the starting point of the line. 8nterpolate 0t= The height of the sta5eout point will be computed through linear interpolation using the height of the starting and ending points of the line. Antenna )t ;for #PS< Shows the height of the antenna reference point ;ARP< above the mar5. Iou can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height in the Antenna Setup dialog. To do this, clic5 the Ant )t button, and select $dit. 0- ;for TS<
10-4
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
)ta6e
$nter the reflector height. Sta5e *pens the Sta5e dialog, assisting the sta5eout process.
Sta9e
The Sta5e dialog is designed to assist in the sta5eout process. The sta5e dialog contains a number of fle ible features which allow you to tailor and customi?e your sta5ing reOuirements. The main dialog consists of an instrument panel along the top, sta5e panel along the bottom and a view. .epending on the current sta5ing application there are a number of different view options which provide different graphical aids for sta5ing. Bith the e ception of the data view there are also four selectable data fields to display specific sta5eout information. Instrument Panel The Instrument panel along the top of the dialog displays #PS> *ptical instrument specific iconic information. This information can be displayed or hidden by pressing the arrow button on the left of the dialog. Sta5eout Panel The Sta5eout Panel along the bottom of the dialog displays a number of buttons used to provide information and facilitate sta5ing. ,esign 2utton: The design button on the left provides the information on the current design point. Pressing the button will display a popup list detailing the design point information. %rro' 2uttons: The arrow buttons to the right of the design button are displayed if the sta5ing application permits multiple point locations. Pressing the buttons will advance forward and bac5ward through the different design locations. -ea&ing 2utton ;for TS<: The read button located to the right of the arrow buttons is used to ma5e an observation.
P/N 7010-0492
10-0
)ta6in.
Store 2utton: The storage button located to the far right is used to save the current sta5ed observation.
2ata Field'
All views e cept the .ata view have four selectable data fields used to display specific sta5ing information. To change one of these data fields simply press on the field and select from a list of all the available fields for the current sta5e module. The .ata view always contains all the available data fields.
Die='
$ach of the sta5ing modules has a number of different views to provide different aspects to help the sta5ing process. To access the different views press and hold on the sta5e dialog until the view popup appears for a new selection.
2ata Die=
The .ata view is accessible on all sta5eout modules. The .ata view provides a detailed list of all data fields available for the current sta5ing module.
Map Die=
The "ap view is also accessible on all sta5eout modules. Bhen sta5ing in the map view the bac5ground image of the sta5eout is the @obYs map. A map menu panel is available which provides the map controls, such as ?oom.
N r/al Die=
The Normal view is available whenever you are sta5ing 5nown design coordinates. This view provides a directional way of locating the design locations. If the distance to the design is more than - m, a blue arrow will point to the target direction with the current location in the center of the dialog. If the distance to the target is less that m, the graphic shows the target point in the center and the current location. As soon as the target becomes closer than the )ori?ontal .istance 10-1
)ta6eo*t 9;
Tolerance value the graphic shows a bullYs'eye target point on the dialog.
O8erhead Die=
The *verhead view is also available whenever you are sta5ing 5nown design coordinates. This view is similar to a map view and shows the current location and design location.
Cr '' Secti n Die=

The !ross Section view is available when sta5ing roads. This view shows the current sta5e location in a vertical display as well as the road cross section. A map menu panel is available which provides the map controls, such as ?oom.
S!rface Die=
The Surface view is available when sta5ing .T". This view shows the surface and current sta5e location. A map menu panel is available which provides the map controls, such as ?oom.
Sta9e !t 24
This dialog helps you sta5e a Point or $levation. *n the dialog is displayed the 0S Point ;already measured<. The Point to Sta5e or $levation to Sta5e. Also displayed is the height of the instrument. "eas Ta5es a measurement to the Rod and displays the elevation and cut> fill values. Store Stores the last measured sta5e point.
Dertical Off'et 24
Certical *ffset
P/N 7010-0492
10-7
)ta6in.
$nter the Certical *ffset for the measurement.
Sta9e Off'et'
9ine Sta5es a line with offsets in the )ori?ontal and Certical directions. Intersection Sta5es the intersection point of two lines parallel to two other lines at specified offsets. -Pt !urve !reates a curve to sta5eout by selecting three points. !urve Sta5es a curve ;section of an arc< at a specified hori?ontal and vertical offset from the curve. Spiral Sta5es points at specified )ori?ontal and Certical offsets with respect to a specified spiral.
Sta9e 4ine E Off'et'

Perform a sta5eout of a line with offsets in the )ori?ontal and Certical directions. Start Point The starting point of the line. The line is defined by the a?imuth, the a?imuth to another point, or the the $nd Point of the line. $nd Point>A?imuth The direction of the line set through either the a?imuth of the line or the ending point of the line. )t !omp 10-5
)ta6e Offsets
The type of height computations for the sta5eout point= 0t o$ Start Pt ;height of starting point<= the sta5eout point has the same height as the starting point of the line. Interpolate 0t= the height of the sta5eout point will be computed through linear interpolation using the height of the starting and ending points of the line ;This is unavailable when the direction of the line is set through a?imuth.< Num Subs The number of subdivisions you want to subdivide the line. %or instance, a value of - indicates the sta5eout of four points by subdividing the line into three eOual segments. Include Transition Point !hec5 mar5 and enable if the transition point should be included in spite of the station distance. "ore... Start Sta The starting station ;chainage< of the line. Ne t *pens the Station D *ffsets screen.
Tran'iti n P int'
The Transition Points dialog allows you to select which available transition points are to be included in the sta5eout. Selections to include= 0or1 en& point: The node point between hori?ontal segments. 0or1 angle point: The hori?ontal angle point, used only in combination with 0or1 end point. 0or1 -a&ius point: The hori?ontal radius point ' Center point. 0or1 intersect: )ori?ontal intersection of start and end tangent. 0or1 mi&point on cur+e: The middle point of a hori?ontal curve. 7ert en& point: The node point between vertical segments. 7ert high point: The highest vertical point.
P/N 7010-0492
10-9
)ta6in.
7ert lo' point: The lowest vertical point.
Stati n E Off'et
The Station D *ffset dialog allows you to define parameters for sta5ing offset locations. Station>Real'Time button The Station>Real'Time button allows you to toggle between sta5ing 5nown and un5nown sta5ing locations. %or station, enter the starting station location. The two arrows to the right allow you to decrease or increase the station by the specified interval. Interval The station interval. Right *ffset>9eft *ffset The right or left hori?ontal offset to be applied. 2p>.own The 2p or .own )eight offset to be applied. 0ac5 Returns to the previous initiali?ation dialog. Sta5e Starts the sta5eout module for the designated offset locations. "ore...
Intersection & Offsets / 4ine 1

The Intersection D *ffsets dialog enables you to sta5eout out the intersection point of two lines parallel to two other lines at specified offsets. The first dialog defines one line ;9ine &< and the offset of the first parallel line. The second dialog field enables you to define another line ;9ine (< and the offset of the second parallel line. The intersection point of these two parallel lines defines the sta5eout point. This dialog contains the parameters of the first line= %rom Point
101010
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
)ta6e Offsets
Starting point of the 9ine &. A? to Pt>A?imuth The direction of the line. It can be set through the a?imuth of the line, a?imuth from the start point to the point selected. Right *ffset>9eft *ffset The right or left offset of the sta5eout point with respect to the line.
Inter'ecti n E Off'et' A 4ine #

This dialog contains the parameters of the second line= %rom Point Starting point of the 9ine (. A? to Pt>A?imuth The direction of the line. It can be set through the a?imuth of the line or the a?imuth from the start point to the point selected. Right *ffset>9eft *ffset The right or left offset of the sta5eout point with respect to the line. Intersect )t The height of the intersection point. Store Point The name of the intersection point. Antenna ;in the #PS: case<>)R ;in the *ptical mode< The antenna height>The rod ;target< height. Sta5e *pens the Sta5e dialog.
Three Pt C!r8e
Iou can create a curve to sta5eout by selecting three points. The dialog changes its appearance depending upon the first point chosen. Iou can manually enter, or select from the list or map the following
P/N 7010-0492
101111
)ta6in.
sets of points= PC Point, Cur+e Point, PT Point, or -P Point, PC Point, PT Point. In the second case the distance between -P Point and PC point should be eOual to the distance between -P Point and PT point. The radius, and the P! and PT points define two curves ' one with delta less than or eOual to &48 degrees ;Small curve< and the other with delta greater than or eOual to &48 degrees ;9arge curve<. Calues of Small or 9arge can be selected from the Cur+e drop'down bo to indicate which of these two curves should be used for computations. P! Point The Point of !urve, the starting point of the arc. PT Point The Point of tangent to the curve. RP Point Radius Point for the curve. !urve Point Any point on the curve. !urve Specify whether to use the Small or 9arger curve. SS Specify the Start Station. Ne t *pens the Station D *ffsets screen.
Sta9e C!r8e E Off'et'

The !urve D *ffsets dialog function enables you to sta5eout a curve ;section of an arc< at a specified hori?ontal and vertical offset from the curve. P! Point The Point of !urve, the starting point of the arc. 101212
)ta6e Offsets
Tangent A?i The a?imuth of the Tangent of the curve ;arc< at the P! point. Radius> .eg !urve> .eg !hord The radius parameters of the curve. 9ength>!hord>Tangent>"id *rd>$ tern>.elta Is the length parameter of the curve. SS The starting station ;chainage< of the line.
Sta9e Spiral E Off'et

The Sta5e Spiral D *ffset dialog is used to sta5eout points at specified )ori?ontal and Certical offsets with respect to a specified spiral. TS Point Tangent to Spiral point. This is the starting point of the spiral. Tangent A?i The a?imuth of the tangent to the spiral at the point TS. Radius>.eg !hord>.eg !urve The radius parameter of the spiral at the ending point. 9ength>Sp !onst The length of the spiral at the ending point, or the Spiral !onstant, the constant of the spiral. Turn Specifies whether the spiral turns right or left. .ir The direction of FmovingF= TS 'Q S! c TangentSpiral'QSpiral !ircle. This is the incoming spiral to the internal circle. !S 'Q ST c !ircle Spiral'Q Spiral Tangent. This is the outgoing spiral from the circle to the Tangent.
P/N 7010-0492
101313
)ta6in.
SS The starting station ;chainage< of the line.
Sta9e S!rface
Sta5e Surface enables you to sta5e a surface as a 5nown fi ed elevation. Select one of three types of Sta5e Surface as reOuired= $levation, Road, or .T".
Sta9e S!rface Ele8ati n

To sta5e a surface of a fi ed elevation= d Select Elevation by clic5ing the selection button. d $nter the elevation value in the editable field. To set the elevation of a desired point as a fi ed elevation, clic5 the list selection or map selection the list or the map. button and select the point from
d $nter the #PS antenna height in the Ant 0t editable field ;in the #PS: case< > the reflector ;target< height in the 0- field ;in *ptical mode< d !lic5 Sta3e to start sta5eout. d If reOuired, chec5 the Create Sur!ace bo . A Cut)Fill or Elevation model can be generated from - or more sta5ed points. The .T" created from !reate Surface is saved as TIN file. !lic5 Ne t to specify the name for a new file. 0y default it will be newT8N'TN@. !lic5 on the !reate TIN dialog to start the sta5eout.
d If reOuired, chec5 the Use Ali%nment bo . The 2se Alignment option enables you to use an e isting alignment to report stations 101414
)ta6e )*&fa'e Ele$ation
and offsets. !lic5 Ne t to select the name of the alignment. !lic5 on the Roads dialog to start the sta5eout. d If reOuired, chec5 the De!ine Boundary bo . The .efine 0oundary option enables you to specify a boundary ;polygon< from 5nown points. !lic5 Ne t to do this in the Surface 0oundary dialog.
S!rface 6 !ndar;
To define a surface boundary= &. In the Points>Point 9ist>9ine'or3>%rea field, select the current method of selection of data reOuired to create the boundary. d %or Points, in the Select Pts drop'down list, choose an option to select multiple points in the @ob for creating the boundary= d All ' all the @ob points. d By -an%e ' points from a range. "ore... d By Code ' points of a selected code. "ore... d By Code Strin% ' points of a selected code string. "ore... d By -adius ' points around a selected point at a certain distance. "ore... d 0y /ayer ' points on a selected layer. "ore... d From Map ' points selected graphically from the map "ore... d From /ist ' points from a list of points. "ore... d %or Point 9ist, press the 9ist selection button and select an e isting point list in the @ob. "ore... The list name will appear in the edit field. The name can also be manually entered into the edit field and added to the point selection by pressing the o5 button. d %or 9ine'or3 and %rea, press either the "ap selection button and select an e isting linewor5>area from the map
P/N 7010-0492
101010
)ta6in.
;more...< or press the 9ist selection button and select an e isting linewor5>area from the list ;more...<. The name will appear in the edit field. The name can also be manually entered into the edit field and added to the point selection by pressing the o5 button. (. The list will display the points currently selected, and the plot will display the created surface boundary. Icons you can use "A#N$T %ield general buttons and icons are described here...
Sta9e S!rface 1 ad
To sta5e a surface of an e isting Road= d Select -oad by clic5ing the selection button. d !lic5 the list selection button road from the list. and select the name of the
d $nter the #PS antenna height in the Ant 0t editable field ;in the #PS: case< > the reflector ;target< height in the 0- field ;in *ptical mode<. d !lic5 Sta3e to start the sta5eout. d If reOuired, chec5 the Create Sur!ace bo . A Cut)Fill or Elevation model can be generated from - or more sta5ed points. The .T" created from !reate Surface is saved as a TIN file. !lic5 Ne t to specify the name for a new file. 0y default it will be newT8N'TN@. !lic5 the button sta5eout. on the !reate TIN dialog to start the
Sta9e 2TM
To sta5e a surface of an e isting .T"= d Select DTM by clic5ing the selection button. 101111
)ta6e 9TM
d !lic5 the list selection button dis5. "ore...
and select the .T" in the
d $nter the #PS antenna height in the Ant 0t editable field ;in the #PS: case< > the reflector ;target< height in the 0- field ;in *ptical mode<. d !lic5 Sta3e to start sta5eout. d If reOuired, chec5 the Create Sur!ace bo . A Cut)Fill or Elevation model can be generated from - or more sta5ed points. The .T" created from !reate Surface is saved as a TIN file. !lic5 Ne t to specify the name for a new file. 0y default it will be newT8N'TN@. !lic5 on the !reate TIN dialog to start the sta5eout.
d If reOuired, chec5 the Use Ali%nment bo . The 2se Alignment option enables you to use an e isting alignment to report stations and offsets. !lic5 Ne t to select the name of the alignment. !lic5 on the Roads dialog to start the sta5eout.
Open 2TM
!urrent .T" The currently selected .T". .T" 9ist 9ist of available .T"s. !reated The date and time the selected .T" was created. "odified The date and time the selected .T" was last modified. 0rowse !lic5 on 0rowse to select a .T" not listed in the above list.
P/N 7010-0492
101717
)ta6in.
*pen *pen the selected .T".
Sta9e P int in 2irecti n

The Sta5e Point in .irection dialog enables you to perform the sta5eout of a point, using the 5nown point, the a?imuth, and the offsets from the a?imuth line. %rom Point The starting point. Type the name manually, or select it from the list or from the map. A?imuth>A? to Pt The a?imuth can be set by value, or as the direction to another 5nown point. Angle *ffset The angle offset from the a?imuth line. )? .ist The distance offset along the angle offset line. Cert .ist The height offset. Store Pt !hec5 this field if it is desired to store the computed point to the data set. Ant )t ;in the #PS: case< > )R ;in the *ptical mode< The #PS antenna height>The reflector ;target< height. Sta5e *pens the Sta5e dialog to perform the sta5eout.
101515
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
)ta6e Point ;ist
Sta9e P int 4i't

The Sta5e Point 9ist dialog enables you to sta5eout e isting points, create a point list to sta5eout, select the staring sta5eout point, and sta5eout in direct or reverse order. Point 9ist The pre'e isting points list. This can be chosen from the list or entered manually. 9ist of Points The list of currently selected points. The 2p and .own arrows to the left of 9ist of points enables you to move the highlighted point up or down in the order of the points. The arrows symbol switches on>off the 5eyboard arrow 5eys that duplicate the arrows on the dialog. The symbol to the bottom right of the map can be used to toggle between the point list and the plot with the point list. Antenna )t ;in the #PS: case< > )R ;in the *ptical mode< The antenna height>The rod ;target< height. Reverse *rder !hec5 to perform a sta5eout starting in reverse oder from the end of the Point 9ist. Sta5e *pens the Sta5e dialog.
Sta9e 24 P int 4i't

The Sta5eout Point 9ist dialog enables you to sta5eout e isting points, select the staring sta5eout point, and sta5eout in direct or reverse order. 0S Point Select the 0S point to be used for the bac5sight measurement. Point 9ist
P/N 7010-0492
101919
)ta6in.
Select or enter the name of a point list to sta5e. 9ist of Points The list of currently selected points. The 2p and .own arrows to the left of 9ist of points enables you to move the highlighted point up or down in the order of the points. The arrows symbol switches on>off the 5eyboard arrow 5eys that duplicate the arrows on the dialog. The symbol to the bottom right of the map can be used to toggle between display of the point list and the plot with the point list. Sta5eout in Reverse *rder !hec5 to perform a sta5eout starting from the end of the Point 9ist. 0S Ta5es the 0S measurement. Sta5eout *pens the Sta5eout dialog.
Sta9e !t Ele8ati n
The Sta5eout $levation dialog enables you to sta5eout a given elevation. 0S Point Select the 0S point to be used for the bac5sight measurement. $levation Select or enter the name of a point list to sta5e. 0S Ta5es the 0S measurement. Sta5eout *pens the Sta5eout dialog.
102020
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
)ta6e C*&$e
Sta9e C!r8e
This dialog enables you to sta5e a curve ;section of an arc< by specifying two points. P! Point The Point of !urve, the starting point of the arc. PT Point The Point of Tangency, the ending point of the arc. Radius> .eg !urve> .eg !hord The radius parameters of the curve. Turn Specifies the direction of the arc. !urve .etermines if the smaller or larger part of the arc between the points is used.
Sta9e 1eal"Ti/e 1 ad
The Real'Time Road dialog enables you to select the road > hori?ontal and vertical alignment for sta5e in real time. The dialog displays the plan of the selection. Road > ) Alnt > )C Alnt The road > hori?ontal and vertical alignment to be sta5ed. This can be entered manually or chosen from the list. Start Sta The starting point of the sta5eout, the distance from the beginning of the road. Ant )t ;in the #PS: case< > )R ;in the *ptical mode< The #PS antenna height>The reflector ;target< height. Ne t
P/N 7010-0492
102121
)ta6in.
*pens the St5 Road dialog.
Stake Road (Slope)

This dialog shows cut>fill for template slopes, and enables you to edit the cut>fill slope values. Template Slopes Select this radio button to apply the template cut>fill slope values. $nter Slopes Select this radio button and enter the cut>fill slope values as reOuired. Sta5e *pens the Sta5e dialog to perform the sta5eout.
Sta9e 1 ad
The Sta5e Road dialog enables you to select the road for sta5eout and displays the plan of the chosen road. Road The road to be sta5ed. This can be entered manually or chosen from the list. Start Sta The starting point of the sta5eout, the distance from the beginning of the road. Antenna ;in the #PS: case<>)R ;in the *ptical mode< The antenna height>The rod ;target< height. Include transition point Press the transition point button to bring up a dialog which will allow you to select which transition points you wish to include. "ore... Ne t *pens the Sta5e Alignment dialog. 102222
)ta6e 7oa Ali.n+ent
Sta9e 1 ad Ali$n/ent
The Sta5e Alignment dialog displays the properties of the cross section on the sta5eout station and helps you sta5eout of all of the desired points. Station The station where the sta5eout is performed. The arrow buttons change the station number by the value of Station Interval. Stn Interval The interval of the station increment. Segment Pt The point code of the current segment. The arrow buttons in this field move the current segment point along the cross section. This will reflect on the scheme in the bottom of this dialog. Right>9eft *ffset The hori?ontal offset from the current segment point. 2p>.own *ffset The vertical offset from the current segment point. %rom the drop'down list= d Specify offsets location d Centerline= both the hori?ontal and vertical offset starts at the centerline. d 8ntersect /e!t= the vertical offset starts at the segment pointM the hori?ontal offset starts at the point of intersection of the line parallel to the left segment with the cross'section. d 8ntersect -i%.t= the vertical offset starts at the segment pointM the hori?ontal offset starts at the point of intersection of the line parallel to the right segment with the cross'section. d Se%ment= the hori?ontal offset starts at the beginning of the segmentM the vertical offset starts at the centerline.
P/N 7010-0492
102323
)ta6in.
d Sur!ace /e!t= the hori?ontal left offset starts at the beginning of the segmentM the vertical offset starts at the point on the surface of the segment that corresponds with the hori?ontal offset. d Sur!ace -i%.t= the hori?ontal right offset starts at the beginning of the segmentM the vertical offset starts at the point on the surface of the segment that corresponds with the hori?ontal offset. Ne t *pens the St5 Road dialog.
Sta9e Sl pe
The Sta5e Slope dialog enables you to select the road for sta5eout and displays the plan of the chosen road. Road The road to be sta5ed. This can be entered manually or chosen from the list. Start Sta The starting point of the sta5eout, the distance from the beginning of the road. Antenna ;in the #PS: case<>)R ;in the *ptical mode< The antenna height>The rod ;target< height. Include transition point Press the transition point button to bring up a dialog which will allow you to select which transition points you wish to include. "ore... Ne t *pens the Sta5e Alignment dialog.
Sta9e Sl pe Ali$n/ent
The Sta5e Alignment dialog displays the properties of the cross section at the sta5eout station and helps you sta5eout the catch point ;the point where the slope crosses the surface of the terrain< and>or 102424
the offset of the catch point.
)ta6e 7oa Ali.n+ent
P/N 7010-0492
102020
)ta6in.
Station The station where the sta5eout is performed. The arrow buttons change the station number by the value of Station Interval. Stn Interval The interval of the station increment. )inge Point The hinge point code. The hinge point is a point of rotation of the !ut> %ill Slopes. The arrow buttons in this field move the hinge point along the cross section. This will reflect on the scheme in the bottom of this dialog. %rom the drop'down list= Specify offsets location d Centerline= both the hori?ontal and vertical offset starts at the centerline. d 8ntersect /e!t= the vertical offset starts at the segment pointM the hori?ontal offset starts at the point of intersection of the line parallel to the left segment with the cross'section. d 8ntersect -i%.t= the vertical offset starts at the segment pointM the hori?ontal offset starts at the point of intersection of the line parallel to the right segment with the cross'section. d Se%ment= the hori?ontal offset starts at the beginning of the segmentM the vertical offset starts at the centerline. d Sur!ace /e!t= the hori?ontal left offset starts at the beginning of the segmentM the vertical offset starts at the point on the surface of the segment that corresponds with the hori?ontal offset. d Sur!ace -i%.t= the hori?ontal right offset starts at the beginning of the segmentM the vertical offset starts at the point on the surface of the segment that corresponds with the hori?ontal offset. Ne t *pens the St5 Slope dialog.
102121
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
)ta6e )lo#e
Sta9e 4ine= r9
To start a linewor5 sta5e, select Sta5e > 9inewor5 menu. 9ine'or3 > Co&e toggles through two linewor5 selections= d Code= allows linewor5 selection by !odeString. d /inewor3= allows linewor5 selection from the @ob linewor5s ;listed in the dialog< or a polyline selected from the "ap. If the line is a bac5ground line, copy the line to the @ob, update the list of linewor5s and select it in the list. Include transition point Press the transition point button to bring up a dialog which will allow you to select which transition points you wish to include. "ore... SS The starting point of the sta5eout, the distance from the beginning of the linewor5. Antenna ;in the #PS: case<>)R ;in the *ptical mode< The antenna height>The rod ;target< height. Ne t *pens the Station D *ffsets dialog.
Stati n E Off'et'
The Station D *ffsets dialog contains the settings for the sta5eout session. Station The station along the line being sta5ed. The two arrows to the right enable you to decrease or increase the station by the interval specified in the Stn Interval shown in the ne t line. Stn Interval The station sta5ing interval. Right *ffset>9eft *ffset
P/N 7010-0492
102727
)ta6in.
The right or left offset of the sta5eout point with respect to the line at the station shown on the Station field. 2p>.own The 2p or .own )eight offset with respect to the height of the line at the station. Angle Pts This option enables you to sta5e one of the three possible offset locations when they sta5eout to an angle point= d &!!set B3= the sta5e location will be on the ;bac5< segment before the angle point. d &!!set A.d= the sta5e location will be on the ;ahead< segment after the angle point. d Bisector= when bisector is selected, the proposed sta5e location will be on the bisectri of the angle at the computed offset from the angle point. !urve Pts This option enables you to sta5e one of the four possible locations when they sta5eout to a curve point= d &!!set= the sta5e location will be on the curve at the offset distance from the curve point. d -#= the radius point. d #8= the point of intersection of tangents to the curve drawn at the start and end curve points. d M&C= the point in the middle of the curve. Sta5e *pens the Sta5e dialog to perform the sta5eout.
2e'i$n Off'et'
The )eight dialog is available in the Sta5eout Point and Sta5eout Point9ist in the upper'left menu by selecting Set Ellipsoi&al ht, Set
102525
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
)ta6e ;ine4o&6
Ele+ation, or Set 8 depending on the coord. sys. and display type. The dialog enables you to change the height of the current point. .esign )eight>$levation !hec5 the control to apply the .esign )eight>$levation for the point to be sta5ed and enter the elevation to be used. Road *ffset !hec5 the control to apply the Road *ffset to the height of the point to be sta5ed and enter the offset value to be used. .T" *ffset !hec5 the control to apply the .T" *ffset for the .T" selected to be sta5ed and enter the offset value to be used.
Set 1eference' A S!rface and P int 1eference'

This dialog is accessible through the the Sta5eout Ciews and the Store Point dialog when the type of sta5ing uses cross sections ;for e ample roads<. The dialog displays the current cross section, graphically displayed with all points shown with chec5 mar5s, the corresponding label to each point, and lines connecting the points. $ach point and line is selectable and will be mar5ed with a green color if selected. Pressing the close dialog button will store the references. All selections can be cleared through= Remove selected Removes all selected references.
Initial P int Na/e

The Initial Point Name dialog enables you to specify the starting name for the points calculated for the sta5eout tas5. %irst Point The name of the first point. !ode
P/N 7010-0492
102929
)ta6in.
Select the code and attributes of the points. The code can be chosen from the list or entered manually.
2e'i$n PtA4a;er
.isplay Store Pt Info !hec5 this control to display the sta5ed point before storing it. 9ayer Select the layer to which this point is to belong.
St re P int
.isplays information regarding the Sta5e Point about to be stored and allows you to add or edit information.
Sta9e Ta&
The sta5e tab displays information regarding the sta5ed point about to be stored in the database. Name The name of the point that will be stored in the database. )R or Ant )t The height of the target or #PS antenna used to sta5e the point. Certical>Slant Specifies whether the entered antenna height is slant or vertical when performing #PS sta5ing. 9ayer Specifies the layer associated with the sta5ed point .
2ata Ta&
The data tab displays the sta5eout information pertaining to the sta5ed point.
103030
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
)ta6in.
Advance Specifies whether to advance to the ne t sta5e point location.
2e'i$n Ta&
The design tab displays information regarding the design point about to be stored in the database. Name The name of the point that will be stored. !ode The feature code and attribute information associated with the point. String The string the feature code is associated with when the code type is a line or area. 9ayer Specifies the layer associated with the point. Note Specifies the note associated with the point. Pt Inc>.ec SpecSpecifies the increment or decrement of the name of the ne t design point.
Off'et fr / CP
*ffset from !P displays information about the offset from the catch point. This dialog appears after the point has been stored. ). *ffset from !P to *P )ori?ontal .istance from the !atch Point to the *ffset Point. !ut>%ill at *P wrt !P !ut>%ill between the !atch Point and the *ffset Point. !ut>%ill at !P wrt )P
103030
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
)ele't Bal*e
!ut>%ill between the )inge Point and the !atch Point. !ut>%ill Slope ;&=n< .esign Slope between the )inge Point and the !atch Point. $levation $levation of the *ffset Point. Slope .ist from )P to IP Slope .istance from the )inge Point to the Intersection Point. C. *ffset from )P to IP Certical .istance from the )inge Point to the Intersection Point. Intersection Point The Intersection Point ;IP< is the point between the vertical line at the )inge point !ut>%ill slope at the *ffset Point.
Select Dal!e
The select value dialog allows you to select which values are to be displayed in the sta5e dialog. In the dialog, only select the value you want displayed and press the green chec5 mar5 to e it the dialog. Iou will be returned to the stateout dialog, and the value you selected will now be displayed in the desired label.
P/N 7010-0492
103131
)ta6in.
Notes2
103232
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
C-a#te& 11
A##li'ations
App' f lder
Clic9 an ic n t !'e an applicati n &!ilt in ; !r de8ice:
Ta3e Photo Starts the !amera application to ta5e pictures. =e! 2ro'ser Starts Internet $ plorer to visit a web address you want. Photo 7ie'er Starts the Pictures D Cideos application to view the pictures attached to the current @ob. Files *pens %ile $ plorer to manage the files.
P/N 7010-0492
11-1
A##li'ations
Notes2
11-2
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
C-a#te& A
"o4 To
4 caliBati n in MAGNET Field
Bhen you need to obtain pointsY coordinates in different #rid co' ordinate systems or a .atum predefined or created in "A#N$T %ield, simply select a desired coordinate system. "A#N$T %ield will use its own mathematical algorithms to transform co' ordinates from the current system to the selected one. %or e amle, a "A#N$T %ield @ob is configured for RT6 survey in a certain grid coordinate system, for e ample, SP!4-'Te as ;!entral<. Point;s< collected on this grid can be transformed to any datum or any grid. To do this, select a desired grid, for e ' ample, SP!4-'Te as ;North<, in the !oordinate System screen. After selecting the grid, "A#N$T %ield will display the point coordinates in the selected coordinate system. See an e ample of transformation into other grid coordinate system here. Bhen performing a tas5 of transformation of #PS pointsY coor' dinates measured in B#S4+ coordinate system into a #round coordinate system, those algorithms of transformation, which are applied to predefined or user'created grids and datums, do not wor5. In this case "A#N$T %ield has no predefined relation between two coordinate systems. Set up 9ocali?ation for coordi' nate transformation from B#S4+ to #round ;and vise versa<. Related topics=
P/N 7010-0492
A-1
"o4 To
g g
0asic !oncept of 9ocali?ation 9ocali?ation with Stereographic Pro@ection on B#S4+
A-2
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
C-a#te& A
g g g g g g g 9ocali?ation with Stereographic Pro@ection on any .atum 9ocali?ation with any Predefined or !reated Pro@ection *ne'point 9ocali?ation Two'point 9ocali?ation Three'point 9ocali?ation Performing 9ocali?ation Importing 9ocali?ation .ata to *ther ,ob
6a'ic C ncept f 4 caliBati n

9ocali?ation in "A#N$T %ield is a calculation of transforma' tion parameters between B#S4+ and a ground coordinate sys' tem. To perform locali?ation, you need to have two independent sets of coordinates for the same point or few points in the "A#' N$T %ield. An independent set of coordinates is a set of such point coordinates that do not have a relation between each other. To perform locali?ation in "A#N$T %ield, you need to manu' ally select coordinates in the #R*2N. coordinate system ;F6nown PointF< and in the #RI. coordinate system or B#S4+> .AT2" coordinate system ;F"easured PointF< for the same point in the current @ob. Such a point is called 9ocali?ation Point. In "A#N$T %ield, hori?ontal locali?ation and vertical locali?a' tion are performed separately. Iou determine which calculation the 9ocali?ation Point uses by selecting the corresponding chec5 bo es G2se )ori?ontalH and>or G2se CerticalH. See an e ample of using a locali?ation point in both locali?ations here. In the common case, when the customer selects three and more locali?ation points for the given "A#N$T %ield @ob and these points ta5e part in both locali?ations, "A#N$T %ield will cal'
P/N 7010-0492
A-3
"o4 To
culate and use seven parameters for transformation of all @ob points= In the hori?ontal plane ;find out the plot here< ' offset vector ;.A, .I< between the origins of coordinate systems, rotation angle between these coordi' nate systems, and scale factor. In the vertical plane ' one shift ;)*<, and two slopes ;) , )y<. If a geoid is set in the @ob, "A#N$T %ield will use this geoid for calculating orthometric elevations. Add the desired geoid for calculating orthometric elevations ;add geoid<. !alculating orthometric elevations without a geoid for points in #round coordinate system can lead to errors in or' thometric elevations. The current version of "A#N$T %ield enables you to perform the hori?ontal locali?ation in three ways= &. 2sing only the stereographic pro@ection on B#S4+ ;%ind out more...<. (. 2sing only the stereographic pro@ection on any datum ;%ind out more...<. -. 2sing any predefined or created pro@ection ;%ind out more...<.
4 caliBati n =ith Stere $raphic Pr <ecti n n 5GS-)

If you perform a tas5 of transformation of B#S4+ coordinates into #round coordinates for a networ5 where the ma imum dis'
A-4
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
tance between the local points is less than / 5ilometers, you can use the simplest locali?ation. To do this type of locali?ation, set Pro@ection to None in the !oordinate System dialog before en' tering locali?ation point;s<. In this case "A#N$T %ield will *N9I use an obliOue stereo' graphic map pro@ection on B#S'4+ as an intermediate step. The 9ocali?ation dialog will have only B#S4+'Q9ocal type in the Type field.
4 caliBati n =ith Stere $raphic Pr <ecti n n an; 2at!/

If you 5now a datum for creating a local coordinate system, you can select this datum in the !oordinate System dialog before se' lecting locali?ation point;s<. In this case the 9ocali?ation screen will have two types in the Type field. If you select .atum'Q9ocal locali?ation type, "A#N$T %ield will use an obliOue stereographic map pro@ec' tion on the selected .atum as an intermediate step.
4 caliBati n =ith an; Predefined Created Pr <ecti n
If you have information about the pro@ection type for creating a local coordinate system, you can select this pro@ection in the !o' ordinate System dialog before selecting locali?ation point;s<. In this case you select #rid'Q9ocal locali?ation type, and "A#' N$T %ield will use this pro@ection and corresponding datum in the process of calculation of locali?ation parameters.
To calculate the locali?ation parameters between two coordinate systems is a more rigorous method than using the stereographic pro@ection for a un5nown local pro@ection. This way enables you to increase the distance between locali?ation points ;up to some hundred of 5ilometers depending on the type of the pro@ection< without loss in transformation precision.
One"p int l caliBati n

To calculate 3 parameters between a datum and a local ground you have to select no less than + locali?ation points. *nly in this case "A#N$T %ield will calculate all of the needed parameters and residuals for locali?ation for each point. )owever, as soon as you add *N9I *N$ locali?ation point, "A#N$T %ield will calculate transformation parameters= only hori?ontal and vertical offsets between two coordinate systems and !ombined Scale factor. Rotation between two coordinate systems cannot be computed. This value is set to ?ero. The com' ponents of the deflection of vertical are set to ?ero as well. 2sing these parameters, "A#N$T %ield will transform measured points ;in the B#S4+ coordinate system< to the ground coordi' nate systems ;see our e ample here<. The hori?ontal ;r)< and vertical ;rC< residuals for this locali?a' tion point are eOual to ?ero ;see our e ample here<, because co' ordinates of the F"easured PointF in the ground coordinate system are eOual to the coordinates of the F6nown PointF and vice versa ;see our e ample here<. Plot A displays a Total Station networ5 in the #round coordinate system, and plot 0 displays a #PS networ5 in B#S' 4+ coordi' nate system. The networ5s have some common points. In an e ' ample with one locali?ation point, we will use points F!(F ;for
Total Station networ5< and point F!'(fB#S'4+F ;for #PS net' wor5<. Plot ! shows that, if both the coordinate systems have non'?ero rotation angle, the accuracy of transformation with only one lo' cali?ation point can be very poor.
T= "p int 4 caliBati n

As soon as you add TB* locali?ation points, "A#N$T %ield will calculate the hori?ontal ;.A, .I< and vertical ;.)< offsets, a?imuth ;rotation< and scale factor ;see our e ample here<= In our e ample with two locali?ation points, we will use points F!(F and F!+F ;for Total Station networ5< and points F!' (fB#S'4+F and F!'+fB#S'4+F ;for #PS networ5<. Two points of locali?ation are enough to calculate all transformation parameters in the hori?ontal plane. The hori?ontal coordinates of the F"easured PointF in the ground coordinate system are eOual to the coordinates of the F6nown PointF and vice versa ;see our e ample here<. The hori?ontal ;r)< residuals for these points are not calculated and set to ?ero. The vertical ;rC< residuals for these locali?ation points are calculated ;see our e ample here<. 0ut the components of deflection of vertical are set to ?ero. %ind an e ample of two'point locali?ation with non'?ero rotation here.
Three"p int 4 caliBati n

As soon as you add T)R$$ locali?ation points "A#N$T %ield will calculate the hori?ontal ;.A, .I< and vertical ;.)< offsets, a?imuth ;rotation<, scale factor, and components of the deflec' tion of vertical ;see our e ample here<.
Also, the hori?ontal ;r)< residuals for these locali?ation points are calculated. Three points of locali?ation are enough to calcu' late all transformation parameters in the vertical plane. The ver' tical ;rC< residuals for these points are not calculated and eOual ?ero ;see our e ample here<.
Perf r/in$ 4 caliBati n

9earn locali?ation on a practical e ample. g g g 2ser Tas5 0efore Rover "easurements After Rover "easurements
(ser Tas3 In the field you will measure a set of points from several bench' mar5s. %ive different benchmar5s are used as base stations for this pro@ect. The ma imum and minimum distance between two benchmar5s is &&+ and &1 5ilometers, respectively. The rover points will be determined from the nearest base station in the RT6 mode. See a map of the pro@ect here. All #PS measurements are performed in the B#S4+ coordinate system. All rover points need to have the coordinates in pro@ec' tion F-& 2T" I#NF ;for Spain<. The error of converting coordi' nates from B#S4+ into F-& 2T" I#NF should not e ceed / cm. The coordinates of the benchmar5s are 5nown and given in the F-& 2T" I#NF for the corresponding datum F$2R*/8fI#NDP-7M. The user tries to apply the transformation algorithms for pre' defined grids and datums in "A#N$T %ield ;in our case, be' tween B#S4+ and F-& 2T" I#NF<, but obtains the errors
more
than 48 cm for plane coordinates and more than & meter for ele' vation for this networ5. The user decides to use locali?ation in "A#N$T %ield. 2e$ore -o+er )easurements To preform locali?ation, you need two sets of the coordinates. The first set is a set of the benchmar5s coordinates in the F-& 2T" I#NF. This set will be used as a set of #R*2N. coordi' nates. The user has this data, and only need to import this set to a "A#N$T %ield @ob. The second set is a set of the coordinates of the benchmar5s in B#S4+ coordinate system. In our e ample, we do not have this set and we need to obtain this data. N*T$= The error of converting coordinates from B#S4+ into F-& 2T" I#NF depends on the errors of two coordinate sets and the way of transformation in "A#N$T %ield. If we assume that transformation in "A#N$T %ield does not bring an additional error, and the errors of both sets are of eOual accuracy, then we obtain the errors of the benchmar5s coordinates in B#S4+ less than . Such an error of benchmar5s coor' dinates in B#S4+ allows the user to convert coordinates from B#S4+ into F-& 2T" I#NF with the error not e ceeding / cm. #iven the long distances between the benchmar5s, the user car' ries out measurements of all five points simultaneously within three hours. Then raw data collected from five receivers is im' ported to "A#N$T Tools software for post processing and ad' @ustment. See the ad@usted networ5 of benchmar5s here.
The error of ad@usted coordinates does not e ceed &( mm in plane, and &1 mm in height, that meet the specified accuracy of transformed coordinates ;see the results here<. These ad@usted coordinates can be used as= g g !oordinates of the base stations to wor5 in RT6 mode, Set of coordinates in B#S4+ for locali?ation.
The user e ports these coordinates ;from the "A#N$T Tools @ob< in te t file format and selects Fdd mm ss.sssF type for 9at> 9on coordinates, because "A#N$T %ield supports this type. To obtain this file clic5 ,ob'Q$ port and select !ustom Te t %ormat in the $ port window. !lic5 the Save button and select the de' sired 9at>9on type in the !ustom %ormat Properties window. See an e ample of creating a file of B#S4+ coordinates in "A#N$T Tools here The user imports these coordinates to a created "A#N$T %ield @ob.
I/p rtin$ the c rdinate 'et' t MAGNET Field < &

After obtaining the both ;B#S4+ and #round< sets of coordi' nates, if you 5now the format of the file, you can import these sets to a created "A#N$T %ield @ob. Importing the B#S4+ set Importing the #round set To import the B#S4+ set of ad@usted coordinates ;the 9at>9on> ) file< to the "A#N$T %ield @ob=
&. !lic5 the $ change icon
and then %rom %ile
. (. In the %rom %ile screen, select the Topcon Te t !ustom file format and clic5 Ne t to continue importing. -. Navigate to the desired file in the %rom Te t screen and clic5 . +. Select the comma delimiter for this file ;see the file creat' ed in "A#N$T Tools here< in the Te t %ile %ormat and clic5 Ne t. /. Select the B#S4+ datum and B#S4+;9at>9on>$ll ht< co' ordinate type of the imported file in the !oordinate Sys' tem screen and clic5 Ne t. 1. Select the format of 9at>9on in the 2nits %ormat dialog and clic5 . 3. The Import Status screen displays the import successfully finishes. 4. The Point screen displays the coordinates of the B#S4+ set. The ne t step is to import a #R*2N. set of coordinates to the current @ob. See the original file of the benchmar5s coordinates in the F-& 2T" I#NF pro@ection here. N*T$= %or locali?ation to wor5 properly the user S)*29. I"' P*RT these points as points in #R*2N. coordinate system and should not indicate the #RI. ;F-& 2T" I#NF pro@ection< coordinate system during the import procedure.
A1010
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
&. To import this file into the "A#N$T %ield @ob, in the %rom %ile, we select the FN$E;U.csv<F format. (. Select the #R*2N. coordinate type in the !oordinate System dialog to import the set of these coordinates. -. After the import finishes successfully, the Point screen displays the coordinates of both sets.
Settin$ the de'ired pr <ecti n

Then you need to set the pro@ection, which will be used in local' i?ation.
&. !lic5 the !onfigure icon
and then the !oordinate
System icon . (. To add a desired pro@ection to the list of pro@ections in the !oordinate System dialog, clic5 in the Pro@ection line and navigate to the corresponding pro@ection in the Pre'.efined panel of the Pro@ections dialog. -. !lic5 the arrow to move the pro@ection to the Active panel and clic5 to close the screen. +. Then this pro@ection appears in the list of pro@ections. Se' lect the pro@ection here.
Addin$ the Ge id file

The last thing you can do before starting field measurements of the rover points is to add the corresponding geoid file. In the !o' ordinate System dialog, clic5
P/N 7010-0492
in the #eoid line and clic5

A1111
Add, to add the corresponding file. See an e ample of adding the appropriate geoid file here. %$ter -o+er )easurements Then you measure all rover points from the corresponding base stations, and after completing all measurements, perform local' i?ation to transform rover points from B#S4+ coordinate sys' tem to #round coordinate system. In the given case the ground coordinate system matches the F-& 2T" I#NF pro@ection.
Creatin$ 4 caliBati n P int'

&. !lic5 Setup and then 9ocali?ation . (. !hec5 that the type of locali?ation is #rid'Q9ocal. -. !lic5 Add and select a point in the #round coordinate sys' tem from the list. +. Then select a point in the B#S4+ coordinate system from the list. /. After clic5ing on the Add 9ocali?ation dialog, the 9ocali?ation dialog displays the first locali?ation point. 1. Perform the above steps and add three more locali?ation points. Iou can see on the 9ocali?ation dialog, that the hori?ontal and vertical residuals for locali?ation points are not more than 1 mm and &8 mm, respectively. All mea' sured rover points, located inside the polygon formed by the benchmar5s, have the same error of transformation from B#S4+ into the #round coordinate system. 3. The Points screen displays all points in the #R*2N. co' ordinate system. In the same e ample, *N9I for T$ST, select the B#S4+' Q#round type of locali?ation. "A#N$T %ield will use the ste'
A1212
reographic pro@ection on B#S4+. This time the error of transfor' mation will be more than &.7 meters ;in hori?ontal locali?ation< for such distances between the locali?ation points.
I/p rtin$ 4 caliBati n 2ata t % &
Other
If you want to import locali?ation data from one @ob to other @ob, you can activate automatic import procedure of locali?ation data to a @ob. &. In the @ob that contains locali?ation data, clic5 !onfigure and then #lobal . (. In the New ,obs tab of the #lobal Settings dialog, select FAlways importF and clic5 close the window. to save the changes and
-. Then create a new @ob. %or this, clic5 ,ob
and
then New ,ob . $nter the @ob name and clic5 to finish the configuration. +. "A#N$T %ield automatically e ports the locali?ation data from the previous @ob to the current @ob.
P/N 7010-0492
A1313
Grid t
Gr !nd Tran'f r/ati n
"A#N$T %ield supports two methods for setting the relation between #rid and #round coordinate systems. *ne method per' forms scaling and rotation relative to some point of the @ob. The other method performs scaling and rotation relative to the origin of the #rid coordinate system. To get started with transformation=
&. !lic5 the !onfigure icon
and then the !oordinate
System icon . (. Select the desired pro@ection through which the lin5 will be found with some #round coordinate system. *nly after selecting the pro@ection the option of #rid to #round transformation will become available. -. To activate the #rid to #round ;or vice versa< transforma' tion select the 2se #rid>#round chec5 bo . +. Press to select a desired transformation method ;from F*rigin PtF, FAvg ,ob )tF and FScale %actorF< and set the corresponding parameters for this method. %ind out more= !reating #round Pro@ection Relative to a Point !reating #round Pro@ection Relative to the *rigin of #rid Sys' tem
A1414
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
G&i
to G&o*n
T&ansfo&+ation
Parameters of transformation from the #rid to #round coordi' nates can be used in #PS sta5e of road points. %or e ample, to sta5e a point at the distance of &88 meters from some point, you have to create a ground coordinate system, which will wor5 as a base coordinate system in #PS sta5e calculation. To do this, se' lect the corresponding #rid and enter the average height of a de' sired portion of the road. The created ground coordinate system enables you to sta5e points at special distances in the grid sys' tem.
Creatin$ Gr !nd Pr <ecti n 1elati8e t a P int

If you 5now the coordinates of a point in both coordinate sys' tems ;#rid and #round< and also rotation of these systems, then to find the relation between #rid to #round coordinate systems, select F*rigin PtF from the Parameters list on the #rid>#round Parameters screen. This method calculates an offset vector in the hori?ontal plane between coordinates of a point ;called the origin point< in the grid and ground coordinate systems and compute the ground co' ordinates from the grid coordinates using this offset. If a rotation angle is present between these coordinate systems, "A#N$T %ield can rotate a grid or ground coordinate system relative to this point. Also "A#N$T %ield ta5es into account a scale factor between these coordinate systems. See the plot here. After determining the relation between both coordinate systems, "A#N$T %ield will calculate ground coordinates from the grid coordinate system and vice versa. See an e ample of using this method below.
P/N 7010-0492
A1010
"o4 To
Exa/ple f !'in$ GOri$in PtG

The current "A#N$T %ield @ob contains two sets of measured points= g g *ne networ5 of points measured by a #R'- receiver from a reference station in #rid coordinate system, for e ample, SP!4- '*hio;North<. Another networ5 of points measured by a Topcon Total Station ;#TS'((8< in the #round coordinate system with the arbitrary choice of ?ero 0S a?imuth.
These networ5s have= g g A common point ' the point !P( of the #PS networ5 and point !P(fTS of the TS networ5. This point is the origin point for our transformation. A common line ' the line between !P( and !P1 points of the #PS networ5, and the line between !P(fTS and !P1fTS of the TS networ5. The a?imuths of this line in different networ5s will be used for calculation of the rota' tion angle between both coordinate systems.
See "ap Ciew for the different networ5s here. To perform #rid to #round transformation for these networ5s=
&. !lic5 , select the desired #rid system ;SP!4- ' *hio;North<< in the Pro@ection field of the !oordinate System screen.
A1111
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
G&i
to G&o*n
T&ansfo&+ation
(. !hec5 the 2se #rid > #round bo to use this transforma' tion, and press to open the #rid>#round Parameters screen. -. Select F*rigin PtF in the Parameters field to activate this method. +. Select the origin point in the #rid coordinate system ;!P( point< from the list. /. Remove the coordinates of the selected point in the fields Northing and $asting, which "A#N$T %ield automati' cally writes in the #rid coordinate system. 1. Type in the values of the #round coordinates of the origin point ;see the #rid>#round Parameters screen here<. 3. !lic5ing in the #rid>#round Parameters screen= g !alculates a combined scale factor for this point. g !ombines the #PS point with the TS point. After that, in the #round coordinate system, the #PS point will have hori?ontal coordinates of the corre' sponding TS point, and, in the #rid coordinate sys' tem, the TS point will have hori?ontal coordinates of the corresponding #PS point. g Performs grid to ground transformation ;and vice versa< ta5ing into account the scale factor. The "ap displays the networ5s either in the #round or #rid co' ordinate system. To ta5e into account the rotation between these two networ5s in this transformation= &. As we see from "ap Ciew for the different networ5s, the grid a?imuth is set by direction of the line !P( ' !P1, and the ground a?imuth is set by direction of the same line in ground coordinate system ;the line !P(fTS ' !P1fTS<.
P/N 7010-0492
A1717
"o4 To
"A#N$T %ield calculates the corresponding a?imuth when you select the start and end points of the line. (. !lic5 in the A?imuth Rotation field. The !ompute Rotation screen allows calculating #rid and #round a?i' muth to obtain rotation angle between two coordinate sys' tems ;see #rid to #round Transformation Bithout Rotation<. -. !lic5 the !ompute button in the #round line. In the !om' pute A?imuth screen, select the corresponding points ;that define the common line in the #round coordinate system< from the list. +. !lic5 the !ompute button in the #rid line. In the !ompute A?imuth screen, select the corresponding points ;that de' fine the common line in the #rid coordinate system< from the list. /. The final rotation angle between two coordinate systems for our e ample is displayed in the Rotation field. !lic5 to save this calculation. 1. The #rid>#round Parameters screen contains all needed values to calculate the relation between the #rid and #round coordinate systems ;see here<. !lic5 in this screen. 3. The #rid to #round transformation is successfully per' formed. %ind a plot here that displays the error of transfor' mation ta5ing into account the scale factor and rotation for the given e ample.
Creatin$ Gr !nd Pr <ecti n 1elati8e t the Ori$in f Grid S;'te/

If you 5now the value of the scale factor between grid and ground coordinate systems or the average height of the networ5,
A1515
G&i
to G&o*n
T&ansfo&+ation
then, in the #rid>#round Parameters screen, you can select FScale %actorF or FAvg ,ob )tF. This method calculates plane ground coordinates by scaling, off' setting, and rotating grid coordinates. %ind graphic e plaination of transformation only by scaling here, only by ratating here, and only by shifting here. To find a relation between #rid and #round coordinate systems= &. If the scale factor is 5nown, select FScale factorF in the #rid>#round Parameters screen, type in a desired value, and select the correct direction ;#rid to #round or #round to #rid< for this value. (. If the average height of the networ5 is 5nown, select FAvg.,ob )eightF in the #rid>#round Parameters screen and type in the desired value of the height in the Avg.,ob )eight field. The Scale %actor will be automatically calculated from= Scale;Factor E +7$ Av%' ob 0ei%.t) Mean;Eart.;-adius,, where Mean;Eart.;-adius c 1-3&888.8 m -. In both cases you can enter the rotation and offsets= g If the angle of rotation is 5nown, type in this value into the A?imuth Rotation field. "A#N$T %ield performs rotation of the #round relative to the ori' gin of the #rid coordinate system. g To shift the #round system from the selected #rid, type in the desired plane offsets on the Northing *ffset and $asting *ffset fields. The final coordinates in the #round will be calculat' ed from= N%roundEN%rid$Nort.in%;&!!set and
P/N 7010-0492
A1919
"o4 To
E%roundEE%rid$Eastin%;&!!set
A2020
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
"o4 To
Off'et' in MAGNET Field

Bhen surveying with #PS receivers and Total Stations ;TS<, you may determine points using different types of offsets. If performing a survey with a #PS receiver, select the #PS de' vice type in the !onnections dialog. If performing a survey with a TS instrument, select the *ptical device type in the !onnections dialog.
Off'et' f r TS S!r8e;
*ffset points are available for surveying only for the Sideshot' .irect measurement method. Select this method for the Topo survey in the Survey Parameters. The *ffset tab will additionally display in the Sideshot'.irect screen to enable determination of any of eight types of offset points.
F ll = the lin9 t find !t / re:
)ori?ontal Angle *ffset )ori?ontal>Certical Angle *ffset .istance *ffset )idden Point Two 9ines Intersection 9ines and !orner
A2020
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
Offsets in MAGNET Fiel
9ine and *ffset Plane and !orner
H riB ntal An$le Off'et Bhat tas5 does this offset type performS' .etermination of hor' i?ontal ;(.< coordinates of an inaccessible center of pipe > tree > pillar using distance and angle measurements. To do this determination= &. $nter the name of the determined point in the Point field of the "easurement tab of the Sideshot'.irect screen. (. *pen the *ffset tab and clic5 in the *ffsets. -. The "easurement tab displays. Ta5e two measurements in any order= &< !lic5 the Side button, and measure the distance and hori?ontal angle to the side of the pipe > tree > pillar. The prism is lo' cated on the side of the pipe > tree > pillar. !lic5 the !enter button, and measure the hori?ontal angle to the center of the pipe > tree > pillar.
(<
Iou can see the plot of measurements for the )ori?ontal Angle *ffset here. Note= The offset point lies on the perpendicular to the line Sta'
"o4tion' To
Prism at the Prism point.
The Points screen will display the coordinates of this offset ;cen' ter< point. The vertical measurements to this offset point are not considered, and )offset c )side
H riB ntalADertical An$le Off'et Bhat tas5 does this offset type performS' .etermination of the hori?ontal and vertical ;-.< coordinates of an inaccessible point distance and angle measurements. To do this determination= &. $nter the name of the determined point in the Point field of the "easurement tab of the Sideshot'.irect screen. (. *pen the *ffset tab and clic5 in the *ffsets. -. The "easurement tab displays. Ta5e two measurements in the following order= &< !lic5 the Prism button, and measure the distance and hori?ontal angle to the prism. The prism is located near the inaccessible point. !lic5 the )A>CA button, and measure the hori?ontal and vertical angle to the inac' cessible point.
(<
Iou can see the plot of measurements for the )ori?ontal>Certi' cal Angle *ffset here. Note= The offset point lies on the perpendicular to the line Sta' tion' Prism at the Prism point.
The Points screen will display the coordinates of this offset point.
2i'tance Off'et Bhat tas5 does this offset type performS' .etermination of the hori?ontal and vertical ;-.< coordinates of an inaccessible point using distance and angle measurements, and additional distance offsets measurements, for e ample performed with the tape. To do this determination= &. $nter the name of the determined point in the Point field of the "easurement tab of the Sideshot'.irect screen. (. *pen the *ffset tab and clic5 *ff' sets. in the
-. The "easurement tab displays. !lic5 to ta5e mea' surements to the Prism. +. Then measure offsets from the Prism to the determined point and enter their values in the corresponding fields of the $nter .istance *ffsets screen. Iou can define the di' rection of the given offset in two ways= either clic5 on the button of the current selection or use the minus sign F'F for the current value. %or instance, and directions are the same. The directions of the offsets are e plained in the figure that you can find here.
Note &= The offset point lies on the perpendicular to the line Sta' tion' Prism. Note (= )offsetfpoint c )prismfpoint : ;2p>.ownfoffset<. The Points screen will display the coordinates of the offset point.
Hidden P int Bhat tas5 does this offset type performS' .etermination of the hori?ontal and vertical ;-.< coordinates of an inaccessible point using distance and angle measurements to two prisms located on the rod. To do this determination= &. $nter the name of the determined point in the Point field of the "easurement tab of the Sideshot'.irect screen. (. *pen the *ffset tab and clic5 in the *ffsets. -. The "easurement tab displays. $nter the distance from the rodJs bottom to Prism ( in the )R field. +. Ta5e two measurements in any order= &< !lic5 the Prism& icon and measure the dis' tance, vertical and hori?ontal angle to the first prism of the rod. !lic5 the Prism( icon and measure the dis' tance, vertical and hori?ontal angle to the second prism of the rod.
(<
%ind the plot of measurements for the )idden Point *ffset here.
The Points screen will display the coordinates of this offset ;hid' den< point.
T=
4ine' Inter'ecti n
Bhat tas5 does this offset type performS' .etermination of the hori?ontal and vertical ;-.< coordinates of an inaccessible point, as intersection of two au iliary lines. Iou create these lines ;by two points< and perform distance and angle measurements of the lineJs points. 0efore performing any measurements, complete the following preparation tas5s= &. Select any two points ;Pt&'& and Pt('&<, from which the desired inaccessible offset point is seen. See the plot here. Bhen selecting the location of these points, bear in mind that the internal angle formed by the two lines should not be less than -8 degrees and more than &/8 degrees. (. Set two more points ;Pt&'( and Pt('(< along the lines FPt&' & ' offset pointF and FPt('& ' offset pointF, respectively. See the plot here. To do this offset determination= &. $nter the name of the determined point in the Point field of the "easurement tab of the Sideshot'.irect screen. (. *pen the *ffset tab and clic5 *ff' sets. in the
-. The "easurement tab displays. Ta5e four measurements in any order= &< !lic5 the 9ine&Pt& button and measure the distance, vertical and hori?ontal angle to the first point of the first line. !lic5 the 9ine&Pt( button and measure the distance, vertical and hori?ontal angle to the second point of the first line. !lic5 the 9ine(Pt& button and measure the distance, vertical and hori?ontal angle to the first point of the second line. !lic5 the 9ine(Pt( icon and measure the distance, vertical and hori?ontal angle to the second point of the second line.
(<
-<
+<
Iou can see the plot of measurements for the Two 9ines Inter' section *ffset here. Note &= The height of the prism for all measured points is un' available in the "easurement tab and should be set in the 0ac5' sight screen. Note (= The height of the offset point is calculated as the mean of the heights of both lines for this point= see the graph here. The Points screen will display the coordinates of the offset ;in' tersection< point.
4ine and C rner Bhat tas5 does this offset type performS' .etermination of the hori?ontal and vertical ;-.< coordinates of an inaccessible point,
as intersection an au iliary line and a plane. Iou create a line ;by two points< and a vertical plane passing through the offset point. Then you perform distance and angle measurements of the lineJs points and angle measurements of the offset point. 0efore any measurements, complete the following preparation tas5s= &. Select any two points ;Pt&'& and Pt('&<, from which the desired inaccessible offset point is seen. See the plot here. Bhen selecting the location of these points, bear in mind that the internal angle formed by the two lines should not be less than -8 degrees and more than &/8 degrees. (. Set point Pt('( along the line FPt('& ' the offset pointF and set up the TS at point Pt&'&. See the plot here. To do this offset determination= &. $nter the name of the determined point in the Point field of the "easurement tab of the Sideshot'.irect screen. (. *pen the *ffset tab and clic5 *ff' sets. -. The "easurement tab displays. Ta5e three measurements in any order= &< in the
(<
-<
!lic5 the 9ine&Pt& button and measure the distance, vertical and hori?ontal angle to the first point of the line. !lic5 the 9ine&Pt( button and measure the distance, vertical and hori?ontal angle to the second point of the line. !lic5 the !orner button and measure the vertical and hori?ontal angle to the offset point.
Iou can see the plot of measurements for the 9ine and !orner *ffset here. Note &= The height of the prism for all measured points is un' available in the "easurement tab and should be set in the 0ac5' sight screen. Note (. The height of the offset point is the height of the line for this offset point ;calculated by e trapolation along the GPt(' & ' Pt('(H line<. The Points screen will display the coordinates of this offset point.
4ine and Off'et Bhat tas5 does this offset type performS' .etermination of the hori?ontal and vertical ;-.< coordinates of an inaccessible point, using an au iliary line and additional distance offsets measure' ments, for e ample made by the tape. Iou create a line ;by two points<, then perform distance and angle measurements of the lineJs points and distance measurements ;from this line< to the offset point. 0efore any measurements, you have to select any two points ;Pt& and Pt(< near the inaccessible point. The line which is created by these points will be an au iliary line. See the plot here. To do this offset determination= &. $nter the name of the determined point in the Point field of the "easurement tab of the Sideshot'.irect screen.
(. *pen the *ffset tab and clic5 in the *ff' sets. -. The "easurement tab displays. Ta5e two measurements in any order= &< !lic5 the 9inePt& button and measure the distance, vertical and hori?ontal angle to the first point of the line. !lic5 the 9inePt( button and measure the distance, vertical and hori?ontal angle to the second point of the line.
(<
+. "easure the offsets from the second point ;Pt(< to the de' termined point and enter their values in the following fields of the $nter .istance *ffsets screen. Iou may de' fine the direction of the given offset in two ways= either clic5 on the button of the current selection or use the mi' nus sign F'F for the current value. %or instance, and directions are the same. The directions of the offsets are e plained in the figure here. Note &= The height of the prism for all measured points is un' available in the "easurement tab and should be set in the 0ac5' sight screen. Note (= *ffset point lies on the perpendicular to the line FPt& ' Pt(F. Note -= -. coordinates of the offset point are calculated relative to line GPt& ' Pt(H ;calculated by e trapolation along the FPt& ' Pt(F line<.
The Points screen will display the coordinates of the offset point.
Plane and C rner Bhat tas5 does this offset type performS' .etermination of the hori?ontal and vertical ;-.< coordinates of an inaccessible point, as intersection of a line of site and a plane defined by three points. Iou create three au iliary points, then perform distance and angle measurements to these points and angle measurements to the offset point. Note that the user creates three au iliary points in the same plane where the inaccessible point is located. All four points must not be on the same line. %ind the plot here. To do this determination= &. $nter the name of the determined point in the Point field of the "easurement tab of the Sideshot'.irect screen. (. *pen the *ffset tab and clic5 in the *ffsets. -. The "easurement tab displays. Ta5e four measurements in any order= &< !lic5 the Prism& button and measure the distance, vertical and hori?ontal angle to the first prism of the plane. !lic5 the Prism( button and measure the distance, vertical and hori?ontal angle to the second prism of the plane.
(<
A3030
MAGNET Fiel
1!0 "el#
-<
+<
!lic5 the Prism- button and measure the distance, vertical and hori?ontal angle to the third prism of the plane. !lic5 the !orner button and measure the vertical and hori?ontal angle to the offset point.
&. Iou can see the plot of measurements for the Plane and !orner *ffset here. Note= The height of the prism for all measured points is unavail' able in the "easurement tab and should be set in the 0ac5sight screen. The Points screen will display the coordinates of the offset point.
Off'et' f r GPS S!r8e;

The *ffsets tab is always presented when you open the Topo screen for the #PS survey. The *ffsets tab contains up to three offset types. The *ffset 9aser is available only if a laser distance meter device is used.
F ll = the lin9 t find !t / re:
*ffset 9ine A?imuth and *ffsets *ffset 9aser
P/N 7010-0492
A3131
Off'et 4ine Bhat tas5 does this offset type performS' .etermination of the hori?ontal and vertical ;-.< coordinates of an inaccessible point, using two measured points and additional distance offsets mea' surements, for e ample, performed with the tape. To do this determination= &. $nter the name of the determined point and the rover an' tenna height in the Point field of the Topo tab. Note= 0e sure that the current type of position calculation method corresponds to the precision of the determined point. (. *pen the *ffsets tab and clic5 *ffsets. in the <
-. Select the Start and $nd points from the map ;clic5 or from the list ;clic5 <, or measure them ;clic5
< in the 9ine screen. +. "easure offsets from the $nd point to the determined point and enter the values. 2se one of two ways to define the direction of the given offset= either clic5 on the button of the current selection or use the minus sign F'F for the current value ;see e amples here<. The directions of the offsets are e plained in the figure here. /. !lic5 to save the calculated coordinates of the offset point. The Points screen will display the coordinates of the offset point.
The offset point lies on the perpendicular to the line FStart Point ' $nd PointF. )offsetfpoint c )point( : ;2p>.ownfoffset<
ABi/!th and Off'et' Bhat tas5 does this offset type performS' .etermination of the hori?ontal and vertical ;-.< coordinates of an inaccessible point, using one measured point and distance and angle measurements from this point to the offset point. To determine a point with the A?imuth D *ffsets tas5= &. Type the name of determined point and the rover antenna height in the Point field of the Topo tab. Note= 0e sure that the current type of position calculation method corresponds to the precision of the determined point. (. *pen the *ffsets tab and clic5 the *ffsets. -. Select Start Point from the map ;clic5 in < or from the
list ;clic5 <, or measure it ;clic5 < in the 9ine screen. +. .efine the direction to the offset point in the A?imuth ' .istance ' )eight screen. 2se one of two methods to de'
fine the offset point in hori?ontal plane ;the hand symbol points out that there is a choice<= &< The hori?ontal angle is determined by the a?imuth to the offset point. %ind the plot here. The hori?ontal angle is determined by the a?imuth to a point ;selected from the list>map<. The offset point lies on the line FStart PointF' FSelected PointF. %ind the plot here.
(<
/. "easure the vertical offset from the Start Point and enter the value in the corresponding field of the A?imuth ' .is' tance ' )eight screen. 2se one of three methods to define the offset point in a vertical plane ;the hand symbol points out that there is a choice<= &< The ?enith angle is measured ;from an inde with 8 derected towards the ?enith<. %ind the plot here. The vertical angle is measured ;relative to 8 that coincides with hori?ontal<. %ind the plot here. The vertical distance between the offset point and the hori' ?ontal passed through the start point. %ind the plot here.
(<
-<
1. "easure the hori?ontal distance offset from the Start Point and enter the value in the corresponding field of the A?i' muth ' .istance ' )eight screen.
3. !lic5 to calculate and save the coordinates of the offset point. The Points screen will display the coordinates of the offset point. Off'et 4a'er Bhat tas5 does this offset type performS' .etermination of the hori?ontal and vertical ;-.< coordinates of an inaccessible point, using distance and angle measurements to the point from a laser rangefinder. "A#N$T %ield enables you to use an e ternal la' ser rangefinder. 0efore any measurement, set the type of the used rangefinder in @ob configuration. To wor5 with an e ternal laser rangefinder=
&. !lic5 the !onfigure icon (. !lic5 the Survey icon .
-. !lic5 in the Rover Receiver screen. +. !hec5 the $ ternal laser option, select which device to connect the laser rangefinder to= !ontroller or Receiver. /. !lic5 Parameters in the Peripherals dialog to set commu' nication parameters between the controller and e ternal laser rangefinder. 1. 0efore starting measurements with the laser rangefinder, ma5e sure that the current coordinate system in the given "A#N$T %ield @ob is datum, grid, or locali?ation. 3. "a5e sure that the @ob contains the coordinates of the point where the laser rangefinder will be located. This point is called F*cc pointF for this offset type.
4. $nter the name of the determined point in the Point field of the Topo tab. 7. *pen the *ffsets tab and clic5 in the *ffsets. &8.Select the name of the e ternal laser rangefinder from the list in the 0luetooth .evices screen. !lic5 in the dialog. &&.Select the *ccupation Point from the map ;clic5 <
or from the list ;clic5 < in the !onfig 9aser screen. &(.$ither enter the a?imuth to the offset point ;if is selected<. %ind the plot here. &-.*r select a point from the list>map ;if is se' lected<. In this case the hori?ontal angle will be deter' mined by the a?imuth to the selected point. The offset point will be on the line F*ccupation PointF' FSelected PointF. %ind the plot here. &+.$nter the laser rangefinder height in the corresponding field. &/.Sight the laser to the desired point and press the %ire but' ton on the laser rangefinder to measure the slope distance and vertical angle to the point. After measurements are successfully performed, "A#N$T %ield displays the Store Point screen with the calculated coordinates of the offset point. &1.!lic5 to save the offset point in the "A#N$T %ield @ob. The Points screen will display the coordinates of the offset point.

MF1.0 Help

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

MF1.0 Help

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

P O S I T I O N I N G

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help

Part Number Rev

Copyright Topcon Positioning Systems, Inc. January, 2012

Intr d!cti n .......................................................... 1"1

Mana$in$ % &' ..................................................... #"1

C nfi$!rin$ % &' .................................................. ("1

Import .ata %rom %ile .............................................. +'&-

!hatting .................................................................................. /'&

Eoom All ................................................................... 4'Eoom 0y Point .......................................................... 4'Chapter .

Table of Contents P.*P

.................................................................. &8'&8 Start 0ase ........................................................................ &8'&8

Sta5ing .................................................................................... &/'& Sta5e folder ..................................................................... &/'&

Please read these Terms and Conditions carefully.

Ter/' and C nditi n'

T1A2EMA13S TopconK, )iPerK, TopS2RCL, Topcon 9in5L,

Man!al C n8enti n'

"ap Shows the current @ob data on the map.

Returns to the home screen.

Help Opti n'

different from that

C nfi$!rin$ a Ne= % &

Select S!r8e; C nfi$!rati n

Confi.*&in. a Ne4 3ob

GPS S!r8e; C nfi$!rati n'

GP) )*&$e, Confi.*&ations

GP) )*&$e, Confi.*&ations

to save the setting.

the pop'up menu that displays by clic5 corner. "ore...

in the top left 31111

GP) )*&$e, Confi.*&ations

Int Satel Par/'

Internal HiPer 4ite

Pacific Cre't 1adi

To set parameters for the Pacific !rest radio=

GP) )*&$e, Confi.*&ations

1 8er C2MA Par/'

1 8er C2P2 Par/'

1 8er GP1S Par/'

GP) )*&$e, Confi.*&ations

1E"S1 FH.1* 1epeater

1 8er 1ecei8er Peripheral'

GP) )*&$e, Confi.*&ations

2efinin$ na/e' f r the 'ta9ed p int'

Settin$ n te' f r the 'ta9ed p int'

Mi'cellane !' ?GPS@ Para/eter'

M de/ 2ial!p Inf

M de/ Internet Inf

M de/ 1ecei8er Inf

#R')iper )iper II #RS'& #RA&

1eal Ti/e 2GPS

Occ!pati n A InitialiBati n Ti/e'

Optical S!r8e; C nfi$!rati n'

O#ti'al )*&$e, Confi.*&ations

O#ti'al )*&$e, Confi.*&ations

Mi'cellane !' ?Optical@ Para/eter'

O#ti'al )*&$e, Confi.*&ations

M nit r Opti n'

Coo& inate ),ste+

NA2-( 2at!/ 2etail'

(. 2se to delete a highlighted pro@ection from the Active panel if reOuired.

GridAGr !nd Para/eter'

GP) )&$e, Confi.&ations

GP) )&$e, Confi.&ations

GP) )&$e, Confi.&ations

GP) )&$e, Confi.&ations

GP) )&$e, Confi.&ations

GP) )&$e, Confi.&ations

O#ti'al )&$e, Confi.&ations

O#ti'al )&$e, Confi.&ations

O#ti'al )&$e, Confi.&ations